Fire Detection - Afa Minerva T882

Ministry of Defence
Defence Standard 02-602 (NES 602)

Issue 1 Publication Date 1 April 2000
Guide to the Installation of Thorn Security

Automatic Fire Detection Systems
Issue 2 Publication Date March 1991

This NES Supersedes
NES 602 ISSUE 1
Record Of Amendments
AMDT INSERTED BY DATE
10

NAVAL ENGINEERING STANDARD 602
ISSUE 2
GUIDE TO THE INSTALLATION OF
THORN SECURITY
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS
The issue and use of this Standard
is authorized on behalf of the
Controller of the Navy by :
Director General Marine Engineering
© CROWN COPYRIGHT 19 9 1
Published by :
Sea Systems Controllerate
Procurement Executive, Ministry of Defence
Foxhili, Bath
MODNES/602/2/1990 (i)

NES 602
Issue 2
CONDITIONSOF RELEASE
General
1. This Naval Engineering Standard (NES) has been prepared for the use of
the Crown and of its contractors in the execution of contracts for the
Crown and, subject to the Unfair Contract Terms Act 1977, the Crown will
not be liable in anyway whatever where the Standard is used for any
other purpose .
2. This document is Crown Copyright and the information therein may be sub-
ject to Crown or third party rights . It is not to be released, repro-
duced or published without written permission of the MOD .
3. The Crown reserves the right to amend or modify the contents of this NES
without consulting or informing any holder .
4. This NES may call for the use of processes, substances and procedures
that may be injurious to health if adequate precautions are not taken .
It refers only to technical suitability and in no way absolves either
the supplier or the user from statutory obligations relating to health
and safety at any stage of manufacture or use .
5. Where attention is drawn to hazards, those quoted may not necessarily be

exhaustive .
MOD Tender or Contract Process
6. This NES is the property of the Crown and unless otherwise authorized in
writing by the MOD must be returned on completion of the contract, or
submission' of the tender, in connection with which it is issued .
7. When this NES is used in connection with a tender or contract, the user
is to ensure that he is in possession of the appropriate version of each
document, including related documents, relevant to each particular
tender or contract .
MODNES/602/2/1990 (ii)

NES602
Issue 2
CONTENTS
Page Clause
AUTHORIZATION (i)
CONDITIONS OF RELEASE (ii)
CONTENTS (iii)
INTRODUCTION (xxiii)
SECTION 1 SCOPE 1
General 0101
Interpretation 0102
SECTION 2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1
SECTION 3 DRAWINGS 3
Fig 1 Typical VCS Fire

Detection System 5
Fig 2 Typical T870 Fire
Detection System
including Intrinsically
Safe (IS) Circuit 7
Fig 3 Typical T880 Fire
Detection System 9
SECTION 4 DEFINITIONS 11
SECTION 5 SITING OF EQUIPMENT 12
Control & Indicating Equipment 0501

Detectors 0502
Ion Chamber & Photo-Electric
Smoke Detector Heads 0508
Fig 4 Equally Space 14
Detectors 37m Basis
Fig 5 Minimum Distance of 15
Detector from Air Outlet

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Clause
Fig 6 Detector Mounted on 15

Perforated Ceiling
Fig 7 Type 6 Probe Unit 16
Mounted in Air Duct
For Use with F35 and
F36 Smoke Detector
Heads
Fig 8 Plan & Side View of 17
T700 Duct Probe Unit
For Use with F700 Series
Smoke Detectors .
Fig 9 MP35 Duct Probe Unit 18
For Use with F700 and
M300 Series Smoke
Detectors .
Fig 10 Compartmentation caused 19
by Deckhead Projection
and Piping
Fig 11 Equally Space 20
Detectors 23m Basis
Heat Sensitive Detector Heads 0509
Infra-red Flame Detector Heads 0511
Cailpoints 0513
End-of-Line Test Units & Resistors 0516
Sounders 0519
High Intensity Warning Indicators 0522
Equipment in Hazardous Areas 0524
SECTION 6 MOUNTING OF EOUIPMENT 23
General 0601
Shock Mountings 0602
SECTION 7 CABLE REOUIREMENTS 23
General 0701
Mains a c Supply Connection 0706
d c Supply Connection 0707
I S Detection Circuits 0708
I S Circuits for Sounders & Other 0714
Warning Devices
Non I S Detection Circuits 0715
Voltage Drop Limitations 0717
Non I S Circuit for Sounders & Other 0718
Warning Devices
Voltage Drop Calculations 0719
MODNES/602/2/1990 (iv)

NES602
Issue 2
Page Clause
Insulation Resistance Tests for H V 0722

Detection Circuits
Insulation Resistance Tests for 0723
L V Detection Circuits
Continuity Tests 0724
SECTION 8 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT 28
General 0801
Protection during Painting Operations 0804
Inspection 0808
SECTION 9 POWER SUPPLIES 30
General 0901
Derivation of Supplies 0902
Current Ratings 0904
Surge Protection 0905
SECTION 10 STORING EQUIPMENT 30
General 1001
Storage of Detector Heads containing 1002
Radioactive Sources
Protection of Photographic Film 1003
SECTION 11 SAFETY 31
Ion Chamber Smoke Detector Heads 1101

Disposal of Burnt-Out Selenium Rectifiers 1102
SECTION 12 SETTING-TO-WORK 32
Insulation Tests 1201

System Functions Checks 1202
Detector Functional Tests 1203
Fire Tests 1206
Callpoint Tests 1210
End-of-Line Test Units 1212
Sounders 1213
High Intensity Warning Indicators 1214
MODNES/602/2/1990 (v)

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Para
ANNEX A AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM 37
'Introduction 1
Function 2
Detection Circuit 6
Fig Al Typical Fire Detection 39
System Block Diagram
Fig A2 Typical HV Detection 40
circuits
Fig A3 Typical LV Detection 41
circuits
ANNEX B DETECTOR HEADS 43
Ion Chamber Smoke Detector Heads Types
F35, F36, F712M .F712E_X and MF300 Series
Function 1
Detector Heads Type F35 and F36 8
Fig B1 Ion Chamber Smoke Detector 44
Heads Type F35 and F36
Operation of Detectors 10
Setting to Work 13
Detector Heads Type F712M & F712EX 16
Heads Type F712M and F712EX
Operation 18
Setting to Work 21
Detector Heads Type MF301 and MF301E .X 22
Heads Type MF301 and MF301EX_
Operation 24
Environmental 25
Electrical Characteristics 26
Table B1 List of the MF301 Range of 51
Detectors
Setting to Work 27
Photo-Electric Smoke Detector Heads 28'
Type MR301 and MR301EX
Function 28
Fig B4 MR300 Detector Range Optical 52
System
Fig B5 Photo-Electric Smoke 53
Detector Heads Type MR301
and MR301EX
Operation 35
Environmental 43
MODNES/602/2/1990
(vi)

NES602
Issue 2
Page Para
Table B2 List of MR301 Range of 56

Detectors
Setting to Work 45
Infra-Red Flame Detector Heads 46
Type F70, S610 and MS302EX
Function 46
Fig B6 F70 Replacement Kit (S610) 58
Fig B7 F70 Replacement Kit (MS302) 59
Detector Head Type F70 51
Fig B8 Detector Head Type F70 60
Operation 51
Setting to Work 54
Detector Head Type S610 55
Fig B9 Infra-Red Flame Detector 62
Type S610
Operation 56
Setting to Work 59
Detector Head Type MS302EX 60
Fig B10 Infra-Red Flame Detector 64
Type MS302EX
Operation 61
Environmental 62
Setting to Work 64
'Heat Sensitive Detector Heads 65
Type F80, D800 and MD300 Series
Operation 65
Detector Heads Type F80, F81 & F82 70
Fig B12 Detector Head Type .F81 67
Function 70
Operation 74
Setting to Work 76
Fig B14 F80 Replacement Kit 71
Detector Heads Type D801, D802, 79
D801EX and D802EX
Fig B15 Rate-of-Rise Heat Detector 72
Heads D800 Series
Operation 79
Fig B16 Circuit Block Diagram of 73
Rate-of-Rise Detector Head
Environmental 84
General 86
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Para
Detector Heads MD300 Series 89

Fig B17 Head Detector Heads - 75
MD300 Series
General 89
Operation 91
Environmental 94
Table B3 List of the MD300 Range of 76
Detectors
Setting to Work 96
H Series Rate-of-Rise and Static 97
(Fixed Temperature) Heat Detectors
Static Heat Detectors -H600 98
and H900 series
Function 98
Fig B18 Static Heat Detector Heads 79
H600/H900 Series
Fig B19 IS Static Heat - Detector 79
Heads Type H604 & H904
Operation 101
Environmental 104
Stock Code Numbers 106
ANNEX C• DECKHEAD MOUNTINGS, 81
Function 1
Types DHM1, DHM2, DHM3, DHM5 and DHM6 2
Description 2
.Fig C1 Deckhead Mounting - Exploded 82
View
. Dimensions and Weight 5
Fixing Centres 6
Detector Base Connections 7
Fig C2 Type DHM1 Detector Base 84
Connections
Connections
Connections
Fig C5 Type DHMS Detector Base 85
Connections
Connections
Setting'to Work 9
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES602
Issue 2
Page Para
Deckhead Mounting for Flame Detector 87

Type S610
Fig C7 S610 Deckhead Mounting - 87
Exploded View
Fig C8 Fixing and Connection Details 88
Deckhead Mounting Type DHM7 10
General 10
Fig C9 Deckhead Mounting Type DHM7 89
Deckhead Mountings Type DHM70R and 12
DHM72R
Deckhead Mountings Type DHM70EX and 15
DHM72EX
Protective Cage Type DHM C 17
Fig C10 Deckhead Mounting Type 91
DHM70R/DHM72R
Fig C11 Connection and Fixing 91
Details for DHM70R/DHM72R
Fig C12 Deckhead Mounting Type 92
DHM70EX/DHM72EX
Details for DHM70EX/DHM72EX
Table C1 Stock Codes for DHM70R/ 93
DHM72R Deckhead Mountings
Table C2 Stock Codes for DHM70EX/ 93
DHM72EX Deckhead Mountings
Deckhead Mounting Type DHMS 18
Fig C14 Deckhead Mounting Type DHM8 94
Details for DHM8 When Used
With H600/H900 Series Detectors
Table C3 Stock Codes for 95
DHM8 Deckhead Mountings .
Deckhead Mounting for M300 Series 21
Detectors
Fig C16 DHM35 Deckhead Mounting with 96
M300 Base
Table C4 Stock Codes for DHM35 with 96
M300 Base
Details of the M300 Detector
Base
Detector Base Type M300 & Accessories 24
Fig C18 Detector Base Type M300 97
Fig C19 M300 Detector Base Skirt 98
Changer Head
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES 602
Issue 2
Page_ Para
Fig C20 M300 Detector Base 99
Continuity Plug
Setting to Work 29
ANNEX D PROBE UNITS, 101

Introduction 1
Description
Type 5 Probe Unit 12
Tube Selection 13
Fig Di Type 5 Probe Unit - Exploded 104
View
Mounting the Unit 15
Setting-to-Work 16
Type 6 Probe Unit 17
Fig D2 Type 6 Probe Unit - Operation 107
Fig D3 Type 6 Probe Unit 108
Exploded View
Duct Probe Unit Type T700 21
General 21
Description 24
Fig D4 T700 - Mounting Holes 110
in Duct
Setting-to-Work 27
Fig D5 Plan and Side Views of T700 111
Duct Probe Unit
Duct Probe Unit Type MP35 28
General 28
Description 30
Fig D6 Duct Probe Unit Type MP35 113
Choice of Detector Type 34
ANNEX E CALLPOINTS 115
Introduction 1
Type W B177A Callpoint 4
Fig El Type WSB117A Callpoint 116
Fig E2 Type WSB117A Fixing Hole 116
Locations
Type ZF121 Callpoint 6
Fig E3 Type ZF121 Callpoint 117
Fig E4 Type ZF121 Fixing Hole 118
Locations
Setting-to-Work 7
MODNES/602/2/1990 (x)

NES602 -
Issue 2
Page Para
CP200 Series Callpoints 8

General 8
Fig E5 CP200 Series Callpoint 119
Test Facility
Switch Rating 13
Material 14
Colour 15
Type of Callpoints in the CP200 Series 16
Stock Codes 17
Fig E6 Callpoints Type CP200,240,250 121
Fig E7 Backbox for Callpoints Type 121
CP200, 240,250
Fig E8 Callpoints Type CP220,230,260 122
Fig E9 Backbox for Callpoints Type 122
CP220,230, 260
Flameproof Callpoint Type GVA/FA 18
Switch Rating 23
Material 24
Colour 25
Stock Code 26
Fig E10 Flameproof Callpoint Type 124
GVA/FA
Fig Eli Connection Details of Flameproof
Callpoint Type GVA/FA 124
ANNEX F END OF LINE TEST UNIT 125

TYPE T46 IS
Function 1
Fig Fl End-of-Line Test Unit Type 125
T46 IS
Description 2
Dimensions and Weight 3
Mounting Procedure 4
Fixing Centres 5
Fig F2 Type T46IS Fixing Hole Locations 126
Connecting Cable 6
Fig F3 T461S Wiring Diagram 127
Setting to Work 7
ANNEX G ALARM SOUNDERS AND HIGH 129

INTENSITY WARNING INDICATORS
Alarm Sounders 1
General 1
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Para
Fig G1 Suppression & Polarized 129
Diodes for Alarm Sounders
Types of Alarm Sounders 4
Fig G2 6" and 9" Bell with Water- 130
proof Gasket Back Box -
Exploded View
Fig G3 Siren Type MS6 131
Fig G4 Connection Details for 132
Siren Type MS6
Banshee IF Electronic Sounder 9
Fig G5 Banshee LF Electronic Sounder 133
Fig G6 Banshee Connection and Fixing 133
Details
Intrinsically Safe banshee IF 10
Electronic Sounder
Londesborough High Intensity Indicators 11
Rotating Beacon 12
Fig G7 Rotating Beacon with Fixing 134
Details
Xenon Flashing Beacon 13
Fig G8 Xenon Flashing Beacon with 135
Fixing Details
Setting to work 14
ANNEX H VCS AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION 137

SYSTEM
Introduction 1
Function 3
System Cabinet 4
Fire Detection VCS Units Type 255 & 7
Type 256
Fig H1 Fire Detection VCS Unit 139
Type 255 (NSN6350-99-525-8341)
Fig H2 Fire Detection VCS Unit 140
Type 256 (NSN6350-99-525-8342)
Power Supply VCS Unit Type 257 12
Fig H3 Power Supply VCS Unit 141
Type 257(NSN6350-99-525-8343)
12 Group Repeater Panel for VCS Unit 13
Type 255 and 6 Group Repeater Panel
for VCS Unit Type 256
Fig H4 12 Group Repeater Panel 142
for VCS Unit Type 255
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES602
Issue 2
Page Para
Fig H5 6 Group Repeater Panel for 143

VCS Unit Type 256
Dimensions and Weights 15
Mounting Requirements 16
Fig H6 6'& 12 Group Repeater Panels : 145
Fixing Hole Locations
Detector Compatibility 18
Power Supply Requirements 19
VCS Unit Type 257 19
Repeater Panel 20
Setting to Work 21
Basic System Checks 21
Detector Tests 28
ANNEX I AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTOR 151

MARINE CONTROL UNIT TYPE T865
Function 1
Fig I1 Automatic Fire Detector 151
Marine Control Unit Type T865
Description 2
Input Voltage and Current 5
Output Voltage and Maximum Loading 6
Environmental Limits 7
Associated Equipment 8
Mounting Procedure . 9
Fixing Centres 10
Fix 12 Type T865 Fixing Hole 154
Locations
Setting to Work 11
ANNEX J MARINE POWER UNIT TYPE 157

T605 MK2
Function 1
Fig Ji Marine Power Unit Type 157
T605 Mk2
Description 2
Input Voltage and Current 5
Output Voltage and Current 6
Fixing Centres 11
MODNES/602/2/1990 (xiii)

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Para
Fig J2 Type T605 Fixing Hole 159
Locations
Connecting-up 12
Setting to Work 13
ANNEX K AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND 161

INDICATING UNIT TYPE T864 MK 2
Function 1
Fig K1 Automatic Control & 161
Indicating Unit Type T864
Mk 2
Description 3
Power Supply & Electrical Data 5
Fixing Centres 8
Fig K2 Type T864 Fixing Hole 164
Locations
Associated Equipment 9
Setting to Work 10
ANNEX L FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T870, 167

MK2
Marine Control & Indicating Unit Type 870 Mk2 1

Function 1
Description 3
Fig L1 Marine Control & Indicating 168
Unit Type T870 Mk2
Fixing Centres 9
Fig L2 Type T870 Mk2 Fixing Hole 171
Locations
Cable Entry 10
Associated Equipment . 11
Setting to Work 12
Multi-Zone Marine Repeater Unit Type T270 Mk3 13
Function 13
Fig L3 Multi-Zone Marine Repeater 175
Unit Type T270 Mk3
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES602
Issue 2
Page Para
Description 14
Fixing Centres 19
Fig L4 Type T270 Mk3 Fixing Hole 176
Locations
Setting to Work 20
ANNEX M FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T868 179
Function 1
Description 2
Type T868 IS Control Unit 3
Fig M1 IS Control Unit Type T868 180
Type T273 Repeater Unit 4
Fig M2 Repeater Unit Type T273 181
Dimensions and Weights 5
Power' Supply Requirements 6
Fixing Centres 9
Fig M3 Type T868 Fixing Hole 183
Locations
Locations
Setting to Work 10
Preliminaries 10
Equipment Required 11
Insulation Tests 12
Voltage Tests 13
Detection Circuit Auto Test Facility 14
Fire Alarm Tests 15
Trigger Threshold Tests 16
Fault Indication Tests 17
Type T430 Relay Flasher Unit 18
Function 18
Fig M5 Relay Flasher Unit Type 188
T430
Description 19
Mounting Procedures 23
Fixing Centres 24
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Para
Setting to Work 25
Locations
ANNEX N FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T880 191

Function 1
Description 4
Fig N1 Control & Indicating Unit 193

Type T880
Variable Legend 6
Fig N2 Variable Legend Strips 197
Specification 7
General 7
Terminal Fields 8
Sounder Outputs 9
Other Inputs & Outputs 10
Fault Monitoring and Indication 11
Other Facilities 12
Detector capability 13
Control Unit Power Unit Supply Ratings 15
Mechanical Specification 16
Environmental Characteristics 17
Mounting Details 18
Fig N3 Fixing Details of Control 208
Units Type T880 and T881
Fitted with "H" Frame
Fig N4 Bezel Mounting Details - 209
For Use With Control Units
Type T880 and T881
Fig N5 Clearance for Removal of 210
Front Cover Assembly of
Control Units Type T880 & T881
Cable Entries 19
Setting to Work 20
Introduction 20
Testing Equipment 21
Preliminary Checks 22
Setting Switches 23
Fig N6 Position of Setting Switches 214
on Control Unit Type T880
PEC (see Fig 03 for T881)
Commissioning checks 24
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES602
Issue 2
Page Para
Repeater Unit Type T280 25

Function 25
Description 26
Fig N7 Repeater Unit Type T280 221
Installation 30
Fig N8 Position of Monitor 222
Resistor R2
Variable Legend 33
Inputs 34
Current Consumption 35
Mounting Details 38
Cable Entries 39
Interconnections 40
Setting to Work 41
Fig N9 Position of Switch Si 226
Stock Codes for T880 System 42
Additional Information on T880 & T280 43
ANNEX 0 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T881 229
General 1
Function 2
Description 4
Fig 01 Control & Indicating Unit 230
Type T881
Variable Legend 6
Fig 02 Insertion of Legend Strips 231
Specification 7
General 7
Terminal Field 8
Sounder Outputs 9
Other Inputs and Outputs 10
Fault Monitoring and Indication 11
Other Facilities 12
Detector Capability 13
Control Unit Power Unit Supply Ratings 15
Mounting Details 18
Cable Entries 19
Setting to Work 20
Fig 03 Position of Setting Switches 236
on Control Unit Type T881
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Para
Function 21
Description 22
Fig 04 Repeater Unit Type T281 238
Installation 26
Variable Legend 27
Inputs 28
Current Consumption 29
Mounting Details 32
Cable Entries 33
Interconnections 34
Setting to Work 35
Additional Information on T881 and T281 37
ANNEX P POWER SUPPLY UNIT TYPE T680 241

Function 1
Description 5
Fig P1 Power Supply Unit Type T680 242
Mounting Details 13
Fig P2 Fixing Details of Power 244
Supply Unit Type T680 Fitted
with Mounting Bars
Cable Entries 14
Setting to Work 15
Fig P3 T680 Power Supply Unit 245
Interconnections
Stock Codes for T680 20
Additional Information on T680 21
ANNEX 0 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T882 247

Function
Description
Fig Q1 Control Unit Type T882 251
Specification 9
General' 9
Sounder outputs 10
MODNES[602/2/1990

NES602
Issue 2
Page Para
Other Outputs 11
Alarm Outputs 11
Faults Outputs 12
Repeater Outputs 13
Detector Capability 14
Number of Detectors 14
Power Supply Ratings 16
Mounting Details 19
Fig Q2 Fixing Details of Control 258
Unit Type T882
Setting to Work 2 0
Introduction 2 0
Fig Q3 Clearance for Removal of 259
Front Cover Assembly of
Control Unit Type T882
Test Equipment 21
.Preliminary Checks 22
Commissioning Checks 23
General 23
Procedure 24
Fig Q4 Position of Links & LED 262
Indicators
Function 25
Description 26
Fig Q 5 Repeater Unit Type T282 269
Installation 30
Mounting Details 32
Setting to Work 35
Silence Alarm Switch 35
Switch Enable 36
Preliminary Checks 37
Commissioning Check 38
Additional Information on T882 Systems 43
ANNEX R ANCILLARIES FOR DETECTOR CIRCUITS 275
I S Interface Unit Type T867 1

Function 1
Fig R1 IS Interface Unit Type 275
T867
Description 2
Fixing Centres 10
Fig R2 Type T867 Fixing Hole 277
Locations
Connecting-up 11
Equipment Compatibility 14

NES 602
Issue 2
Pag Para
Cable Specification for Detector Circuits 16

Setting to Work 17
I S Interface Assembly Type System 601 2:8
Function 18
Fig R3 IS Interface Assembly 279
Type System 601
Description 19
Fig R4 System 601 with Front 280
Cover Removed
Enviromental Limits 24
Fig R5 System 601 Fixing Hole 281
Locations
Cabling Requirements 26
Table Ri Limitations on IS Cables 281
Connecting up 27
Equipment Compatibility 31
Setting to Work 33
Extended Flashing & Indicator Units 34
Function 34
Extended Flashing Unit (Watertight) 35
Extended-Flashing Unit (Square) 39
Fig R6 Watertight & Square 284
Extended Flashing Units
Connections 42
Extended Indicator .(Square) 43
Extended Indicator (Round) 47
Fig R7 Extended Indicator 285
Square
Round
Extended Indicator Type E18 51
Type E18
Fig RIO Connection Details for 287
Extended Indicators
Additional Stock Codes 55
Detector Isolate Timer Type MTD24 56
Function 56

Power Supply Requirement 59
Fixing Centres 61
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES602
Issue 2
Page Para
Fig R11 Detector Isolate Timer 289

Type MTD24
Fig R12 MTD24 Fixing Hole 290
Locations
Connecting up - 62
Fig R13 Connection Details for 291
MTD24
Setting to Work 63
ANNEX S ANCILLARIES FOR CONTROL UNITS 293
Relay Unit Type T12M/HD 1

Function 1
Fig S1 Relay Unit Type T12M/HD 293
Description 2
Operating Voltage and Current 4
Fixing Centres 6
Fig S2 Type T12M/HD Fixing Hole 294
Locations
Connecting Cables 7
Fig S3 Type T12M/HD Circuit Dia . 295
Setting to Work 8
Surge Suppression Unit Type T61 9
Function 9
Fig S4 Surge Suppression Unit 296
Type T61
Description 11
Operating Voltage and Current 13
Fixing Centres 15
Fig S5 Type T61 Fixing Hole 297
Locations
Connections 16
Setting to Work 17
Fig S6 Type T61 Circuit Diagram 298
Mimic Drive/ZonalOutput Module 18
Function 18
Salient Features 22
Construction 26
Electrical Specification 28
Stock Codes 29
Programming and Setting to Work 30
MODNES/602/2/1990 (xxi)

NES 602
Issue 2
Page Para
Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module 31

Function 31
Fitting the Module 33
Programming and Setting to Work 34
Lamp Dim Module 35
Function 35
Fitting the Module 38
Setting to Work 39
Fig S7 Module Lay-out in T880 303
Controller
Muster Alarm Interface Unit Type T480 40
Function 40
Muster Alarm Timing 47
Fig S8 T480 Fixing Hole Locations 306
Setting to Work 49
Muster Alarm Switch 50
Fig S9 Connection Details for T480 308
ALPHABETICAL INDEX 309
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES 602
Issue 2
INTRODUCTION
1. This Naval Engineering Standard (NES) is sponsored by the Procurement

Executive, Ministry of Defence, Chief Above Water Systems Executive (CASE)
Section ME341 .
2. ht is to be applied as required to any Ministry of Defence contract for the

siting, fitting and connection of THORN SECURITY fire detection equipment in
all Surface Ships and Submarines .
3 . If it is found to be unsuitable for any particular requirement the Sponsor is

to be informed in writing with a copy to Director Naval Architecture/Surface
Ships (DNA/SS), Section NA145 .
4 . Any user of this NES either within MOD or in industry may propose an
amendment to it . Proposals for amendments that are not directly applicable
to a particular contract are to be made to the Sponsor of the NES, and those
directly applicable to a particular contract are to be dealt with using
existing procedures or as specified in the contract .
5. No alteration is to be made to this NES except by the issue of an authorized

amendment .
6. Unless otherwise stated, reference in this NES to approval, approved,

authorized or similar terms, means by the Ministry of Defence .
7 . Any significant amendments that may be made to this NES at a later date will
be indicated by a vertical sideline . Deletions will be indicated by 000
appearing at the end of the line intervals .
8 . This NES has been reissued to include the latest THORN SECURITY equipment and
to update departmental nomenclature .
9. When NES are incorporated into contracts users are responsible for their
correct application and for complying with contract and any statutory
requirements . Compliance with an NES does not of itself confer immunity from
legal obligations .
NES 602
Issue 2
This page is intentionally blank .
MODNES/602/2/1990

NES 602
Issue 2
1. SCOPE
General
0101 This NES states the requirements for the siting, fitting and connection of
THORN SECURITY automatic fire detection equipment in all Surface Ships and
Submarines .
0102 The fire detection equipment, when installed, is to function as a completely

autonomous fire detection system capable of raising audible warning and
specific visual indication on automatic or manual initiation of alarms .
0103 Special requirements for the installation of THORN SECURITY equipment are
given in the installation documents for that equipment . Where such special
requirements differ from the requirements of this NES, special requirements
are to take precedence .
Interpretation
0104 The responsibility for interpretation of this NES rests with CASE Section
ME 341 to whom any question arising from this NES is to be referred .
2. RELATED DOCUMENTS
0201 Reference is made to :
Referred to in Clause
SFA 3012 : 1972 BASEEFA (British Approvals Service 0524

for Electrical Equipment in
Flammable Atmosphere)
Certification Standard
EN 54 : Part 5 European Standard for Annex B

1977 Components of Automatic Fire
Detection Systems . Heat
Sensitive Detectors - Point
Detectors Containing a Static
Element
S .O .L .A .S International Convention Annex E

for the Safety of Life at Sea .
(a Sub-Committee of the
International Maritime
Organization) .
BS .4568 Steel Conduit and Fittings

with Metric Threads of
ISO Form for Electrical
Installations .
Part 1 Steel Conduit, Bends and Couplers . 0711
NES 602
Issue 2
BS .5345 Code of Practice for the

Selection, Installation and
Maintenance of Electrical
Apparatus for use in
Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres (other than
Mining Applications or
Explosives Processing) .
Part 4 Installation and Maintenance 0710, Annexes B and R

Requirements for Electrical
Apparatus with Type of
Protection 'i' . Intrinsically
Safe Electrical Apparatus and
Systems
BS .5445 Components of Automatic Fire

Detection Systems .
Part 5 Heat Sensitive Detectors ; Annex B

Point Detectors containing a
Static Element .
BS .5501 Electrical Apparatus for

Potentially Explosive
Atmospheres
Part 1 General Requirements 0401, 0708
BS-5783 : Code of Practice for Handling 0801

of Electrostatic Sensitive
Devices
BS6667 : Part 3 Method of Evaluating Annex B

Susceptibility of Radiated
Electromagnetic Energy
DEF STAN 05-34 Marking of Service Materiel 1002
DEF STAN 61-12 Wire, Cords and Cables, Annex R

Electrical - Metric Units
Part 5 Cables Special Purpose, 0713

Electrical and Cables, Power,
Electrical (Small Multi-core
Cables)
NES 119 The Requirements for Fire 0502

Protection and Damage Control
for Surface Ships .
NES 502 Requirements for Electrical 0803, 0807, 0901

Installations .
NES 602
Issue 2
NES 512 Guide to Cables, Electrical and 0706, 0707, 0715,

Associated Items 0716, 0721
Part 6 Cables, Electrical Miniature and 0715

Subminiature and Equipment Wires .
NES 525 Requirements for Electric Cables, 0707, 0713

Thin Wall Insulated, Limited
Fire Hazard .
NES 526 Requirements for Cables, Electric 0713

Rubber Insulated Limited Fire
Hazard Sheathed for General Services .
NES 527 Requirements for Cables, Electric, 0713

Fire Survival, High Temperature
Zones and LFH Sheathed .
NES 726 Requirements for Cleanliness of 0802

Ships during Build .
JSP392 Instructions for Radiological 1101

Protection .
BR 862 Naval Magazine and Explosive 0508

Regulations .
BR 6521(101) Alarm Systems - Type 21 Frigates Annex H
BR 6521(104) Alarm Systems - HMS BRISTOL Annex B
BR 6521 (108) AFA-MINERVA Fire Detection Annex M

Systems in Coastal Minehunters
BR 6521 (201) 12-Group and 6-Group MINERVA Annex H

Fire Detection Units : VCS Types
255 and 256
BR 6521 (202) MINERVA Fire Detection Power Annex H

Supply Unit : VCS Unit Type 257
BR 6521 (203) Fire Detector Heads with Deckhead Annexes C and D

and Exhaust Trunk Mountings
THORN SECURITY PUBLICATIONS
FIL-0005 Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module Annex S
FIL-0007 Lamp Dim Module Annex S
UHM 1000 Fire Detection System Type T882 Annex Q
UHM 1001 Fire Detection System Type T881 Annexes N and 0
UHM . 1002 Fire Detection System Type T680 Annex P
NES 602
Issue 2
UHM 1004 Mimic Drive/Zonal Output Module Annex S
UHM 1005 Fire Detection System Type T882 Annex Q
UHM 1006 Fire Detection System Type T880 Annex N
UHM 1007 Fire Detection Systems Type T280, Annexes N and 0

T281
THORN SECURITY/AFA-
MINERVA DRAWINGS
15108 Type 6 Probe Unit - Drilling of Annex D

Sampling and Exhaust Tubes .
15600 Type 6 Probe Unit - Mounting Annex D
517-001-033 Type 5 Probe Unit - Assembly Annex D
0202 In the tender and procurement processes documents can be obtained as

follows :
a. British Standards British Standards Institution,

Linford Wood, Milton Keynes,
MK14 6LE
b. Defence Standards D Stan 1, Kentigern House, 65 Brown St,

Glasgow G2 8EX
c. Naval Engineering MOD Library Services (Bath),

Standards Foxhill, Bath BA1 5AB
d. Other Documents - Tender or contract sponsor to advise .
MOD Library Services (Bath), Foxhill, Bath, BA1 5AB (Telephone Bath (0225)
884884) can advise in cases of difficulty .
0203 All applications to Ministry establishments for related documents are to

quote the relevant MOD Invitation to Tender or Contract number and date,
together with the sponsoring Directorate and the Tender or Contract sponsor .
3 . DRAWINGS
0301 Three typical fire detection system interconnection diagrams are included in
this NES for the following fire detection systems, with hazardous areas
protected by detection circuits connected via an intrinsically safe
interface unit Type T867 :
a. VCS Unit Type 255 and VCS Unit Type 256 fire detection systems .
b. Fire detection system Type T870 Mk 2
c. Fire detection system Type T880

NOTE S.
1 . REPEATER
ARE DEPENDENT
2 . LOCATION
REQUIREMENTS
3 . TYPICAL
PROTECTION
BE INTEGRATED
4 . SILICON
BE
FOR
USED MUST
SCREEN
PANELSON AND
OF EQUIPMENT
SYSTEM
CABLES
.
SHIP'S
SHOWN
FOR INTRINSICALLY
ALWAYS
I.S .INCIRCUITS
STATED
BE
IS
FOR THE 7667 INTERFACE UNIT
WATCHKEEPER
CLASS CONSOLES FITTED
DEPENDENT ON SHIP'S
REFERS
EQUIPMENT
ONLYWITH THE SYSTEM
ARE PREFERRED .
TO COMPARTMENT
PROTECTION
SCREENED
VCS 257 POWER SUPPLY (FOR VCS 2551

VCS 257 POWER SUPPLY (FOR VCS 2561
36-WAY TERMINAL STRIPS
LI
S110N
115V SORT
SINGLE PHASE
SUPPLY
LI I(21T1IT2IT3ITL
SIG GROUP I
TEST
GROUP TEST
SG i
1
1111111111
L T T T3GROUP
SO
I
GROUP I
TL 1T T6 7 6
GROUPTEST
GROIF
mmommomm
44
TEST
I I I I I I I I I I
9
9
SHOULD NOT
CABLE
SAFE 11AT.5 .1ONECIRCUITS
EARTHED POINT
SHOULD COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS
UE I . S . CERTIFICATE
5 BRS APPLICABLE III THIS EQUIPMENT ARE BR 652112021 :- BR
LI IL21T1112113ITL
SIG
TOTHE
.ANDCABLE
652112011
BR 651117031
VCS 255 12-GROUP FIRE DETECTION UNIT

VCS 256 6-GROUP FIRE DETECTION UNIT
GROUP 2 LI ILIITI
1
G 1
~mmm CROUP S
51G TEST
mmommmom
TEST
GROUP 9
SIGI TEST $1G I TEST
.
3
WAVCSTO HECONSOLE
I6
GROUPIT21T3114
N .B.C.O
CENTRALISE
ALARMS
AND
WARNINGS
AC BC C
EE PER'S
.H .Q.S
3 LIIL2ITIIT21TIITL
RCS 2 S
'OUP
5(0 TEST SIG TEST SD TEST SIG
r I
II
OR OUPTESTI
1 I 1 I I I I I I 1
I6
~mmm®mRSUP
TEST
I
SECTION 3 VCS 2 5
GROUP 10
BELL
I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 1
27
mmmummommomomm
LI I®mmmmmmmm®mmmfn®®fad®mff1O1mI~Rim61ii1~1~IFIO161Q1 GROUP II
TERMINAL CHA SER

M.ILTKORE
TOCABINET
27
LIIL2ITIITTIT3ITL
GROLP 5 G 6
36
ROUP I1TL
SIG I TEST SIGI TEST SIG TEST
I 11 1 I 1 I I I I l 1 I I SEIC71I~ l I 5 256
TT 7
I
L
SIG
I I
I
I
I
fvC5 256
I A200
I A30
I ALO
CONTROL I A50
INCLUDES
CORES i
• II
I
DIO
•
I El11
0
I • E20
I T
7
Eo COMMON -VE
0
O
A60
0
0
0
0
O
o
B0
BIO
O
0
0
0
O
LP17(GROUP
LPIB IGROUP
LP22 (SY EM 02
GROUPTEST
3
I I I I 1 I I
27
9
ST
LP2L (SUDPPLY • E3
• EL
0
O
2)
31
Y
LPIR(GROUPLI • AL
VCS 255
LPI61GROUPII • AT S
r
LP21(GROUP 61 • A •
LP23( ELL
(COMMON BELL
REPEAT) -VE
VE ON ON VE
Al
• A3
A6
AS 1
AT
6
82
~~ LP13
B&PI5
-- SAND) GROUP REPEATER PANELS - J
OUPEST
36
LIIL2ITIIT21T3ITL,
I∎
36
0
0
2
I
G
0
0
0
1
_
LPIIGROUP11
V PL(GROUP 41 I
LP201GROLW 51 `'• A5 4 .4 PSIGROUP51
ll, P6(GROUP6)
• A7 0.14 • P7(GROUP 71
fro LPB IGROUP BI
LIPS IGROUP91
~~~ lOGI20l1Pg1
All ~~LPIIIGRDUPIII I
A12
B 14
LPI2IGROUP72(
LPI(
FIG . I TYPICAL VCS FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

~
ll LP2IGROIIP 21 1
PI IGROP 31 I
,STS€TfC
14 1
la T
11 LJ
EACH
I
'
F36 TYPE DETECTOR HEADS

DETECTOR
RESILIENT MOUNTISNMOUNTED DNA - 5761
.S.N .53L0-99-92+
BOX EARTH S1UpF
121314 S 61T1'Ig1 10 111 is IsIT' 116119120
9• ON
Tf
Lt
S2 55
LI
OEM
VCS 255 GPIIVCS 255 GP2 5

LI
I l,l = 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I I I I I I
.........~ 1-
Vr
._- 1
1221233k1'512121291291 W 311321 33134131136137l139140
54 5
2
76-67 __ 1 I
BOX BOX EARTH Si D -_ TS§7___
L1- 13. 1
SCREEN
LI-221 I-------------
.
T6 9I I I I I 1 I I I I I
CS 156 GROUP I I
JUNCTION 5)
, iI
SCREENf_ I
.I
I
I
THIRD DETEC-TO~R
1
OURTH DETECTOR
DETECTORS
MOUNTINGS HOUSES) IN DHMS
OR IN YRODE
(MAY . 10 DETECTOR
FIRST DETECTOR
DETECTORS
J
sECONQDECTO6
NGS ORHOUSED
RDOUS AREA
I
UNITS
S/CIRCUITJ
IN DHM6
IN PROBE UNITS
ISSUE -2
GROUP ONE
rvcS 2561
(WHERE
FACILITY
F ;G 1
Page ;i6
TEST
REWIRED35

NES 602
ISSUE 2
DETECTOR No .1 DETECTOR No.2 DETECTOR No .3

IWIIN INTEGRAL FLASHER)
I OR RESISTOR (TO BE FITTED BY AFA-MINERVA
ENGINEER TO LASI DETECTOR IN ZONEI
_,
EXTERNAL
EXTERNAL
WATERTIGHT
ON-WATERTIGHT
FLASHER
FLASHER F35 DETECTORS
O WITH DHN1
IF Z E I
MOUNTINGS
1tI (SEE NOTE II
OR ALTERNATIVELY
WITH PROBE UNITS
F35
t
RELAY
SAFE AREA
HAZARDOUS AREA
d .c . SUPPLY r 1 OHMS INTRINSICALLY SAFE
S--raeOA EARTH STUD
SCREENS
I
T I
I~
I I ZONE 2
30 LINE TEST
I I UNIT T26 IS
5A dc . SUFFLYS
I
INTRINSICALLY SAFE T867 INTERFACE UNIT
DETECTOR No.1
F3S WITH OHMS MOUNTING
AND NON-FLASHING BASE
T870 MK2 CONTROL UNIT
1
OL a
J-ZI O
100-12050-80 11 <OV ct . N NOTES:
0 0 _ZONE 6
NORMAL SUPPLY
NPUTI
SO-60H : Q
ol 0 0 0 M
O-Z2 0
1. WHEN CONNECTED TO SHIP'S 24V d .c . SUPPLY A FAULT INDICATION WILL BE
f
0
0
0
0 0
J SPARE
CONTACTS
0 O
O t1
ZONE 7
O-Z3
0-
C---Z
0
0
0 OBTAINED AT THE 1270 MK3 REPEATER UNIT IN THE EVENT OF COMPLETE
SUPPLY FAILURE AT THE TR70 MK2 CONTROL UNIT .
2 . WHEN SHIP'S 24V d.c . SUPPLY IS NOT USED REMOVE LINK BETWEEN 702151
ON THE T270 MK2 AND T831111 ON THE T17b MKZ .
0 0 0 Q
0-
ZONE 3 o---
- E 1
0- NOT 3 0
LINK T831111 TO 182191 ON 7170 MK2 TO OBTAIN REPEAT FAULT INDICATION
.
3. WHEN T270 1413 IS NOT USED, AND A CLOSED-CIRCUIT ALARM LOOP IS
0 0 O- 0 REQUIRED TO BE BROKEN ON ALARM OR BY REPEATER BOARD RELAY
0-_ } ZONE L FAILURE, FOR EACH ZONE LOOP CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS :-
EMERGENCY SUPPLY 24V d .c- INPUT
0 0 BELL
OUTPU 0 Q_ZONE 9
O-- 0
0 0 21y". 0 0=l ZONE 0-Z
1 ERNINALS 188111 AND 187111-ZONE 1
TERMINALS
S TSR
786121
21 AND 187121-107111-ZONE
ZONE 2
250AA 0
0
0
0
0
0
J' S 0 ZONE $0
0-Z 0
TERMINALS (3) AAND87(AND T -ZONE 3 ETC.
4 . A TYPE FIO HEAT RISE DETECTOR MAY BE USED WITH THIS SYSTEM N PLACE
0 0 0 OF DETECTOR TYPE F35, E .G . IN GALLEYS .
0 0 0 0 0 .-
0 0
S . SILICON CABLES ARE PREFERRED . SCREENED CABLE IS TO BE USED FOR
12 12 12 12 INTRINSICALLY SAFE (I .S .) CIRCUITS AND SCREEN MUST ALWAYS BE
EARTHED AT ONE PONT.
Tel TB2 T83 8! TBS TB6 107
12 CABLE FOR I.S .CIROUTS SHOULD COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS STATED
IN THE I .S . CERTIFICATE FOR THE T567 INTERFACE UNIT .
EXTERNAL BUZZER
T270 MK3 REPEATER UNIT
Q
O TEST REPEAT 0
e COMMON FAULT Q
ZONE ISOLATE
0
0
COMMON -re REPEAT
ZONE FIRE
0
TO SHIP'S
Q
J SILENCE ALARMS
INDICATORS 0
SEE NOTES 1 AND 2 2LV IT O 0
S W'LY
(D INTERNAL
0
BUZZER
_ b -} 0
O COMMON .ve
TB2 T I
FIG 2 TYPICAL T870 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM INCLUDING INTRINSICALLY SAFE (I S .) CIRCUIT FIG 2
%P
7

NES 602
ISSUE 2
TERMINAL FIELD R
RLA RLC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 28 27 28 29 30 31 32
7 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 p 7 7 9 9 7 7 9 p 9 2 7 p p 9 7
M c U 0 U 0
m K K U z z U Z + + + + + + 4 + + +
H
> >
> 2 0 U Z z U Z
0 0 0 0, 0 0,0 0
RLB RLD
i
SEE NOTE 4
ZONES 9 - 32 DETECTION CIRCUITS
SEE NOTE 5 SEE NOTE 3
SEE NOTE 6
C.U. TO BE EARTHED
ZONES 1-8 24V DC 110/220Y DC TO SHIPS HULL MINIMUM
DETECTOR CIRCUITS SUPPLY SUPPLY I CABLE SIZE 6m I .
SEE NOTE 3 = I SUPPLY SEE NOTE 5 SUPPLY SEE NOTE 5
1
ALTERNATIVE I
TERMINATION FOR Ih I
E. 81 OR B2 WITHOUT I
0. SOUNDERS I rls~l/l~
2 L. I
I
IIII T280 REPEATER .~ T280 REPEATER
-
E I
0. jl SEE NOTE 7 1I
2 L JIL
I
I-` J 1
SEE NOTE 2
E. TBC LB LC LA PSF F OV
0. .LSEE NOTE 7
L. I1 ?
I +IN +atT
T680 POWER UNIT +OUT +M +OUT
1o
NEXT
J
1, N
4--
1
-IN -OUT 4K -ouI
PCB CONNECTIONS FOR UK 6R/DHM6 MOUNTING
UK 72R OHM 72R HEAT DETECTORS FOR S610 FLAME DETECTOR
+IN FOR F712M I .C . SMOKE
4- H580 - 58° (WITH / WITHOUT REMOTE
DETECTOR WITH REMOTE H680 - 68 ° INDICATION)
INDICATION H930 - 93° SEE NOTE 12
SEE NOTES 9, 10 & 11 D601 - 60 °
NOITc D802 - 1020
(WITH /WITHOUT REMOTE INDICATION)
-OUT -IN -OUT 1 . CONNECT BS+ TO 28V UNLESS THE LOAD IS TOO GREAT FOR
-IN
THE T680 POWER UNIT IN WHICH CASE CONNECT BS+ TO AN
HEAT DETECTOR UK70R OHM 70R ALTERNATIVE SOURCE OF SUPPLY. 6 . THE CONNECTION OF THE C2 IS GIVEN IN UHM-1006/3 .
HEAT DETECTbOR HEAT DETECTOR
H602° MOUNTING FOR F712M PARA 3.4. •) .
11601 60 11600°
H900o H902o I .C. SMOKE DETECTOR 2 WHERE SCREENED CABLES ARE USED, THE SCREEN MUST BE
H901 90 ° 7 . THE HOUSRTOS MUST BE EFFECTIVELY EARTHED .
SEE NOTES 9 & 11 EARTHED EXTERNALLY TO THE UNIT HOUSING AND AT ONE
END ONLY .
8. ALL POLARITIES TO BE STRICTLY OBSERVED .
3 . ALL USED ZONE CIRCUITS MUST BE TERMINATED WITH A
9 . DETECTOR BASE CONNECTIONS SHOWN FOR UNGATED
4k7 OHM RESISTOR . DETECTOR/CALLPGINT CONNECTIONS
RESPONSE. IF GATED RESPONSE IS REQUIRED, CONNECT
ARE SHOWN .
+VE TO TERMINAL 1 .
LED 4 . THE CONNECTIONS BETWEEN Rt, R2. R3, R6 AND 28V ON
TERMINAL FIELDS A AND E ARE REQUIRED ONLY IF A ZONE 10. IF REMOTE INDICATORS ARE USED WITH 72R BASES, L .E.D . ON
BASES WILL NOT OPERATE IN UNDATED RESPONSE .
OUTPUT/MIMIC DRIVE PCB IS FITTED TO TERMINAL FIELD E .
-IN
IR -OUT -OUT -IN
5 . THE POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS SHOWN FOR THE T280
REPEATER UNITS MAY ONLY BE USED WHERE SUFFICIENT
POWER IS AVAILABLE FROM THE T680 . CONNECTION OF
II . RESISTOR R - 270 OHMS.
12.11' REMOTE INDICATOR IS FITTED THE INDICATOR MUST

BE REMOVED.
CP 230-260 0801/D802 THE 28V TERMINALS OF THE REPEATER MUST OTHERWISE BE
CONNECTIONS WITHOUT M300 BASE MADE AT AN ALTERNATIVE SOURCE OF SUPPLY . THE VOLTS
CP200, CP240 . CP250
PCB FOR GATED OPERATION FOR ALL M300 SERIES DROP ON THE OV CONNECTION BETWEEN THE T880 AND THE FLT INDICATES CONNECTIONS OF LINE MONITORING
MANUAL CALLPOINT
WITHOUT REMOTE INDICATION DETECTORS T280 MUST NOT EXCEED O .SV, RESISTOR, TO BE FITTED TO LAST DETECTOR FIG . 3
PLOT CODE M4017-1 IN GROUP, (VALUES 4K7). PACE 9/10
BY COMMISSIONING ENGINEER .
FIG 3 TYPICAL T880 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

NES 602
Issue 2
4. DEFINITIONS
0401 For the purpose of this NES the following definitions apply :
Detection Zone (or Group) - a number of fire detectors or

callpoints connected in one
circuit of a fire control unit
to afford fire protection in a
specified area, the area
specified being indicated at
the control equipment .
Hazardous Area - an area in which explosive
gas-air mixtures are or may be
expected to be present in
quantities such as to require
special precautions for the
construction and use of
electrical apparatus, e .g .
requiring an IS system .
High Voltage (HV) - voltages above 50V dc and 35V
rms ac
Intrinsically Safe (IS) - an intrinsically safe system,
including apparatus and
wiring, is one in which a
spark, however caused, has
insufficient energy to cause
ignition in a gas or vapour
group as specified in BS5501 :
Part 1 .
Low Voltage (LV) - voltages up to and including
50V dc and 35V rms ac
Non-Hazardous Area - an area in which explosive
gas-air mixtures are not
present in quantities . such as
to require special precautions
for the construction and use
of electrical apparatus .
0402 Where the terms 'High Voltage Systems' and 'Low Voltage
Systems' are used they refer to the voltage on the detector
lines, not the supply voltage to the Control Unit .
High Voltage is nominally 220V dc

Low voltage is nominally 20V dc
MODNES/602/2/1990 11

NES 602
Issue 2
0403 THORN SECURITY Limited
The fire detection equipment referred to in this NES is now

supplied by the Company known as THORN SECURITY Limited .
Over the years, due to mergers and acquisitions there have
been a number of changes to the company name . The equipment
has previously been supplied under the following company and
trade names :
The Minerva Detector Company

Minerva Fire Defence
Minerva Marine
Minerva Fire Defence (EMI) Limited
AFA-Minerva Limited
AFA-Minerva (EMI) Limited
THORN-EMI PROTECH Limited
5. SITING OF EOUIPMENT
Control and Indicating Equipment
0501 Equipment with visual indicators and/or manually operated

controls is to be sited such as to allow optimum visibility
of indicators and maximum accessibility of controls . The
control unit will normally be sited in the Damage Control
Centre and the repeater unit on the Bridge or at one or more
specified strategic locations .
Detectors
0502 The selection of compartments to be protected is to follow

the guidelines in NES 119 .
0503 On High Voltage Systems detector indicators are prohibited

in hazardous areas . There is no restriction on the use of
detector indicators on Low Voltage Systems .
0504 Detector heads are to be accessible for maintenance and

replacement purposes .
MODNES/602/2/1990 12

NES 602
Issue 2
0505 Each detector head is to be mounted in the appropriate

deckhead mounting or probe unit and sited where it will be
most receptive to the fire characteristic that it is
designed to detect, subject to feasibility of mounting .
NOTE A marker plate with the Trefoil symbol must be mounted
adjacent to all ion-chamber smoke detectors .
0506 Incidental factors likely to impair the effectiveness of

detector heads or restrict the nominal coverage figures
quoted in this NES are to be taken into account when siting
individual detectors and in determining density, ie the
number of detector heads required to protect a particular
area . Factors affecting selection of detector heads for a
particular fire risk are outlined in Annex B .
0507 Great care must be taken in selection and siting to ensure

that prevailing ambient conditions are unlikely to give rise
to unwanted alarms .
Ion-Chamber and Photo-Electric Smoke Detector Heads
0508 Where practicable the smoke detector head is to be mounted

at the highest point of the protected space . The distance
between the detector head sensing chamber and the deckhead
must not exceed 450mm . The following coverage and siting
arrangements apply .
a. In engine rooms and machinery spaces : the maximum

coverage provided by ion-chamber smoke detector heads
arranged in a regular pattern is 37m 2 per detector
head, which may be reduced by incidental factors
affecting the positioning of detector heads . (Photo-
Electric smoke detector heads are not recommended for
these spaces .) Incidental factors are :
(1) The complex shape of spaces . Ea~h space is to be

separately dealt with on the 37m spacing basis
with the number of detector heads allocated to the
space always rounded up and equally spaced (Fig
4) .
MODNES/602/2/1990 13

NES 602
Issue 2
r 3 .5m
2.25m
I
7m ~ 7m ~ 7m
FIG 4 EQUALLY SPACED DETECTORS, 37m 2 BASIS
(2) High velocity air currents . Detector heads are to

be kept away from direct air outlets (Figs 5 and
6) . When protecting air ducting, detectors are to
be mounted in probe units (Figs 7, 8 and 9) .
MODNES/602/2/1990 14

NES 602
Issue 2
H
AIR DUCT H AIR STREAM
1 .8m MINIMUM
FIG 5 . MINIMUM DISTANCE OF DETECTOR FROM AIR OUTLET
1 .2m SQUARE BLOCKED OFF
PERFORATED PERFORATED
CEILING CEILING
tttt l t t t
AIR STREAM AIR STREAM
FIG 6 . DETECTOR MOUNTED ON PERFORATED CEILING
MODNES/602/2/1990 15

NES 602
Issue 2
VENTILATION OUCT
(CUT AWAY 10 SHOW TUBE ASSEMBLY)
FIG 7 . TYPE 6 PROBE UNIT MOUNTED IN AIR DUCT FOR

USE WITH F35 AND F36 SMOKE DETECTOR HEADS
(3) Effective compartmentation caused by trunking,

deep beams, piping, equipment racking or
machinery . Each compartment or volume f2rmed by
beams etc is to be dealt with on the 37m
spacing basis, with the number of detector heads
allocated to the space always rounded up and
equally spaced (Fig 10) .
MODNES/602/2/1990 16

NES 602
Issue 2
DUCT WALL
INSIDE
DUCT WALL
FIG 8 . PLAN AND SIDE VIEWS OF T700 DUCT PROBE UNIT FOR
USE WITH F700 SERIES SMOKE DETECTORS . UNIT SHOWN FITTED
WITH DETECTOR, BASE AND PROBE TUBES
MODNES/602/2/1990 17

NES 602
Issue 2
INLET TUBE
AIR INLET HOLES
ON REVERSE SIDE
FACING INTO AIR FLOW
END CAP- .
FIG 9 . MP35 DUCT PROBE UNIT FOR USE WITH M300 AND F700 SERIES
SMOKE DETECTORS
MODNES/602/2/1990 18

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG 10 COMPARTMENTATION CAUSED BY DECKHEAD PROJECTION

AND PIPING
b In magazines : Clauses 0508 ~l) (2) and (3) apply,

with coverage reduced to 23m per detector .
Deck to deckhead racking for missiles forms a
typical example of compartmentation (Fig 11) .
MODNES/602/2/1990 19

NES 602
Issue 2
RACKING
23m 2
FIG 11 EQUALLY SPACED DETECTORS, 23m2 BASIS
c. In all compartments above, below and around

magazines : protection is to . be provided as in
Clause 0508b and in accordance with BR 862
d. In electronic ecuipment spaces : general

protection is to be provided as in Clause 0508b .
Individual high intrinsic value items of
equipment such as computers may require extra
protection as specified by equipment or system
Statements of Technical Requirement .
MODNES/602/2/1990 20

NES 602
Issue 2
Heat-sensitive Detector Heads
0509 Each heat-sensitive detector head sensing element is to

be not less than 25mm and, where practicable, not more
than 150mm below the deckhead . In galleys the coverage
of a single detector is nominally 37m subject to
incidental factors as listed in Clause 0508a (1) (2) and
(3) .
0510 Heat-sensitive detector heads are not to be used in

probe units .
Infra-red Flame Detector Heads
0511 Infra-red flame detector heads are usually mounted in

addition to smoke detector heads, in strategic positions
with the detector head sensing element at the highest point
of the protected space in line-of-sight with the likely fire
source .
0512 Infra-red flame detectors are not to be used in probe units .
Callpoints
0513 The callpoint is to be mounted at a height of 1 .4m from the

deck in an accessible position on the exit route from the
protected space .
0514 The callpoint can be situated in a hazardous area provided

it is certified as a component of a specified intrinsically
safe fire alarm system or certified flame proof .
Note :, Callpoints are not usually specified for RN Ships and

Submarines .
0515 In spaces likely to be subject to sea spray and where ever

physical robustness is required, callpoint Type WSB 117A,
CP230 or CP260 are to be used .
End-of-line Test Units and Resistors
0516 End-of-line test units are to be sited as Clause 0513 .
MODNES/602/2/1990 21

NES 602
Issue 2
0517 In hazardous areas, the T46 IS end-of-line test unit

is to be used provided it is certified as a component of a
specified intrinsically safe fire alarm system .
Note :, End-of-line test units are only used on systems that do
not have self monitoring of the detector wiring or
where other test facilities are not provided . Where
self monitoring is provided an end-of-line resistor is
to be fitted in the base of the last detector on each
group .
0518 Where end-of-line test units or resistors are fitted the

detectors must be wired in series parallel ie : spurring is
not permitted .
Sounders
0519 Each sounder alarm is to be sited so that it can be heard

clearly throughout the relevant space(s) protected and,
where possible, must be of sufficient audibility to be heard
above the highest ambient noise level . On RN ships sounders
are normally only mounted adjacent to the control unit and
repeater(s) .
0520 The sounder is to be distinctive in pitch or pulsing and is

to be sited in such a location that it is distinguishable
from other audible alarms .
0521 All THORN SECURITY low voltage control units monitor the
sounder outputs so any devices connected to these outputs
must be suppressed and polarized . An end-of-line resistor
is to be fitted across the last device and spurring is not
permitted .
High Intensity Warning Indicators
0522 Where there is high noise level, flashing high intensity

warning indicators are to be installed to supplement audible
alarms and draw attention to other visual indicators, eg 2
off Londesborough high-intensity indicators (Type 100 G .L .
red lamps) as installed in diesel generator spaces in
Minehunters .
0523 Care is to be taken to ensure that the flashing light will

not interfere with the proper functioning of any infra-red
flame detector connected in another detection zone (group) .
MODNES/602/2/1990 22

NES 602
Issue 2
Equipment in Hazardous Areas
0524 Siting of equipment and cables in hazardous areas is subject

to BASEEFA intrinsically safe certification for the fire
detection and/or alarm system specified as applied by
BASEEFA Certification Standard SFA 3012 :1972 .
6. MOUNTING OF EOUIPMENT
General
0601 Units are to be secured by means of bolts, screws or studs

of correct size, as detailed in the installation drawing,
utilizing the fixing holes provided . Dimensions between
fixing holes for individual units are laid down in the
relevant Annexes .
Shock Mountings
0602 Shock mountings of approved type are to be used where ever

specified by SSC or where required to meet the shock
standard called for .
7. CABLE REOUIREMENTS
General
0701 All cables are to comply with the requirements of SSC .
0702 Cables run in troughing are to be physically separated from

other cables to avoid induced currents likely to cause
malfunctioning of the fire detection system .
0703 Wherever specified, special earthing requirements to avoid

'earth loops' are to be complied with .
0704 Detector circuit wiring is to be physically separated from

all other circuits . The wiring of an intrinsically safe
detector circuit is to be separated from that of the non-
intrinsically safe circuit by at least 6mm in order to avoid
the possibility of arcing or invasion of the intrinsically
safe circuits arising from contact or induction .
MODNES/602/2/1990 23

NES 602
Issue 2
0705 Power supply ac and dc pairs are to be physically separated

to avoid induced ac in the dc supply .
Mains ac Supply connection
0706 The cable is to be 1 .5mm 2 440V grade butyl or EP rubber, CSP

sheathed cable to NES 512 . Larger cable can be used if the
voltage drop requirements in Clause 0717 are not met .
dc Supply Connection
0707 The cable between the fire detection system battery or

ship's emergency dc distribution board and the control unit
is to be 2 .5mm 440V grade butyl or EP rubber, CSP sheathed
twin cable to NES 512 . For new installations an equivalent
LFH cable from NES 525 is to be chosen . Larger cable can be
used if the voltage drop requirements in Clause 0717 are not
met .
IS Detection Circuits
0708 All cables are to comply with the requirements of SSC and
are, in addition, to meet certified safety requirements for
circuits used in all gas groups specified . The gas groups
are listed in BS5501 :Part 1 under the gas group reference,
eg Group IIA .
0709 The safety requirements impose limitations on measurements
taken between conductors and between conductors and earth
for circuits within the hazardous area of a certified
system . The limitations are specified on the certificate
for each gas group and are usually quoted as follows :
a . Maximum permissible capacitance

b . Maximum permissible inductance
c . Maximum permissible inductance/resistance
0710 Cable is to be run in conduit with its screen earthed only

at the control unit or the I .S . barrier if installed remote
from the control unit . No other cable is to be run in the
same conduit . All connections and earthing arrangements
must meet the requirements of BS5345 Part 4 in addition to
any connection methods specified in the certification .
MODNES/602/2/1990 24

NES 602
Issue 2
0711 Screwed conduit and fittings to BS4568 :Part 1 are to be

used .
0712 For HV detection systems, two types of oil resistant,

elastomeric instrument cables, designed for operating
temperatures of -30 0C to +90 0 C, meet the requirements
outlined in Clause 0709 :
a. BICC marine cable type MEHCBH (DL) 7/0 .30, 0 .5mm2 ,
250V rating .
b. BICC marine cable type MEHCBH (DL) 7/0 .34, 0 .75mm 2 ,

250V rating .
c . Other suitable cables are :
NSN Cat No 0561/521-6971 for two wire systems
NSN Cat No 0561/521-6974 for three wire systems
0713 For LV detection circuits the following cable types are

available :
a . PVC insulated and protected screened cables to DEF
STAN 61-12, Part 5, designed to operate between
-55 °C and +85 ° C .
b. Elastomeric instrument cable as in Clause 0712 .
c . On the later RN vessels only cables from the limited
fire hazard are to be used . (NESs 525, 526 and 527
refer .)
IS Circuits for Sounders and other Warnincr Devices
0714 Where the sounder or device is within the hazardous area,

the requirements of Clauses 0708 to 0711 apply .
Non IS Detection Circuits
0715 For connecting the components of a non-IS detection

circuit the following cable specifications are
recommended :
a. 1 .5mm 2 butyl or EP rubber 440V cable CSP sheathed, to

NES 512 .
MODNES/602/2/1990 25

NES 602
Issue 2
b. 16/0 .20 twin or multicore cable to NES 512 :Part 6 .
0716 In machinery spaces or areas of high ambient temperature,

1 .5mm silicone rubber insulated 440V cable to NES 512 is to
be used .
Voltage Drop Limitations

0717 All circuit cable, with the exception of battery and charger
cable, is to be of sufficient size to limit the voltage drop
to 1 .OV under maximum circuit current conditions for the
length of cable run . For cables used in battery and charger
circuits the voltage drop is not to exceed 0 .5V .
Non IS Circuits for Sounders and Other Warning Devices
0718 Where the sounder or device is outside the hazardous area,

the requirements of Clauses 0715 and 0716 apply .
Voltage Drop Calculations

0719 The cable size required for connection to items of equipment
at a given distance from the power source can be calculated
by reference to the appropriate table in the particular
specification .
0720 To find and use the Table appropriate to the type of cable
selected, the following data must be known :
a . Conductor material eg copper
b . Number of cores
c . type of insulation : butyl rubber, EP rubber or

silicone or LFH
0721 Having found the relevant table, reference is to be made to

the appropriate 'Maximum Conductor Resistance per km' column
with the points made in Clause 0717 in mind .
MODNES/602/2/1990 26

NES 602
Issue 2
Note : The 'Maximum Conductor Resistance per km' figure does

not take into account the outgoing and return
conductors, ie the figure is to be doubled for a twin
cable .
The voltage drop for a given length of cable is to be

calculated on the maximum circuit current required,
which must not exceed the current rating given in the
table for the particular cable .
Example : To find the butyl twin cable suitable for wiring in

conduit to a siren rated at 24V 3A dc, at a distance of
15 metres from the supply source, allowing a voltage
drop not exceeding 1 .OV . Table 4 in NES 512 gives :
Max conductor Running current Length of cable
resistance per km x of the device x between sounder
and power supply
per km x 2
Voltage d5op
for 1 .0mm cable 15 x 2
= 20 x 3 x 1000
= 1 .8V which exceeds 1 volt
Voltage drop
= 13 .7 x 3 x 1000
= 1 .23V which exceeds 1 volt
Voltage drop
= 8 .21 x 3 x 1000
= 0 .74V which does not exceed 1 volt and is therefore suitable .
Insulation Resistance Tests for HV Detection Circuits

0722 Butvl, EP, silicone or LFH cable : the insulation
resistance measured with an approved 500V insulation
tester between conductors and earth is to be not less
than 20 meghoms .
MODNES/602/2/1990 27

NES 602
Issue 2
Insulation Resistance Tests for LV Detection Circuits
0723 Butvl, EP . silicone or LFH cable : the insulation

resistance measured with an approved 500V insulation
tester between conductors and earth is to be not less
than 1 meghom . Under no circumstances may a high
voltage insulation tester (Megger) be used between the
conductors of a system once the electronic equipment
has been connected .
Continuity Tests
0724 With the conductors connected together at one end of
the circuit pair, the loop resistance measured is to be
less than 5 ohms .
8. PROTECTION OF EOUIPMENT
General
0801 Low voltage controller electronic assemblies contain C-MOS
integrated circuits which can be damaged by static . The PEC
track or the components must not be touched . If the
electronic assembly is removed from the equipment, it must
be stored in an anti static packing . Under no circumstances
should it be packed unprotected in ordinary polythene or
polystyrene . Handling procedures to be to the requirements
of BS 5783 .
0802 Equipment is not to be installed until agreed Clean Ship or
Clean Compartment conditions have been achieved in
accordance with NES 726 .
0803 During the period when installation or refit is proceeding,

all installed and stored equipment, with the exception of
detector heads containing radioactive sources, is to be
protected in accordance with NES 502 .
MODNES/602/2/1990 28

NES 602
Issue 2
Protection During Painting Operations
0804 Wherever spray painting is to be carried out, detector heads

are to be removed from their bases and stored in dry, clean
conditions . Detector heads containing radioactive material
are to be stored as detailed in Section 10 . Detector bases
are to be masked to prevent contamination of electrical
contacts by paint .
0805 Detector heads and bases must not be painted .

0806 It is important to mask items of equipment to ensure that
paint does not impair the visibility of indicators and
operation of controls . Callpoints are to be masked to
prevent obscuration of the glass area and any special
identifying colour . End-of-line test units are to be masked
to ensure that paint does not impair operation of the
switch .
0807 If, during refit, shot blasting is necessary, all items of

equipment, including detector heads and bases, are to be
suitably protected against damage and dust, as stated in NES
502 . In the event of damage to a detector, reference to be
made to Section 11 .
Inspection
0808 On completion of painting operations :

a. All visual indicators likely to be affected are to be
examined and cleaned as necessary to ensure that they
are completely unobscured .
b . All user controls are to be examined and checked for
correct operation .
c . All indicator and user control legends are to be
unobscured and legible .
MODNES/602/2/1990 29

NES 602
Issue 2
9. POWER SUPPLIES
General
0901 The supply of electrical power to automatic fire detection
equipment is to conform to the requirements of NES 502 .
Derivation of Supplies
0902 ac power supplies are to be taken from the ship's high
integrity main ac distribution boards via an automatic
change-over switch and suitably fuses . There is to be no
switch between the fuse and the fire detection equipment .
0903 Where a secondary dc supply is required, it is to be taken

from the ship's emergency dc distribution board or from the
fire detection system battery as applicable . The supply is
to be suitably fused and there is to be no switch between
the fuse and the fire detection equipment .
Current Ratings
0904 Voltage and current requirements of specific items of

equipment are to be found in the appropriate Annexes .
,Surge Protection
0905 Where systems operate from LV supplies and are not surge
suppressed, eg control units Type T864, T865 and T868, the
surge suppressor Type T61 is to be connected in circuit
unless surge free supplies can be guaranteed .
10 . STORING EOUIPMENT
General
1001 Before installation and during refit, equipment is to be
stored and protected against moisture, dust and physical
damage . The instructions given in Clause 0801 must be
complied with .
MODNES/602/2/1990 30

NES 602
Issue 2
Storaqe of Detector Heads Containing Radioactive Sources
1002 Detector heads are to be placed in a separate store

designated for the purpose, with its entrance door suitably
identified by the radioactive trefoil symbol (DEF STAN 05-34
refers) .
Protection of Photographic Film
1003 If stored continuously near unexposed photographic or X-ray

film, detector heads containing radioactive sources may
influence the radiation-sensitive layer of the film . To
avoid any detrimental effect, a minimum distance of 2 metres
is to be maintained between detector heads and films .
11 . SAFETY
Ion-Chamber Smoke Detector Heads
1101 Ion-chamber smoke detector heads contain a small amount of

radioactive material and are not to be dismantled . Where
detector heads have been damaged or involved in a fire,
contamination monitoring (for alpha radiation) should be
carried out if suitable instruments are available . Place
the damaged detector head in a polythene bag and dispose of
in accordance with instructions in JSP 392'
Disposal of Burnt-out Selenium Rectifiers
1102 When removing a burnt-out selenium rectifier from equipment,

precautions are be taken to avoid inhalation or ingestion of
selenium dust . The rectifier unit is to be carefully removed
to avoid dispersal of settled dust and immediately placed in
an airtight plastic bag or similar container . When in
harbour, disposal is to - be by conventional means . When at
sea, after having first ensured that the container with its
contents will sink, it can be disposed of overboard .
1103 Before fitting a replacement rectifier unit, the chassis is

to be thoroughly cleaned using a vacuum cleaner of the
disposable bag type . The bag is to be disposed of in the
same manner as for burnt-out units .
MODNES/602/2/1990 31

NES 602
Issue 2
1104 Personnel employed on this work should wash their hands

thoroughly before handling food, cigarettes or other
materials that may come into contact with the mouth .
12 . SETTING-TO-WORK
Insulation Tests
1201 Insulation tests are to be carried out on all system cables

and must meet the insulation requirements for the particular
system . The cables MUST be disconnected from any electronic
equipment prior to carrying out insulation tests .
WARNING : FOR INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS, HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION

TESTS MUST ONLY BE MADE ON DETECTOR CABLES IF THE
HAZARDOUS AREA IS IN A SAFE CONDITION . IF THE AREA IS
CONSTANTLY SUBJECT TO HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS, THE ONLY
TEST THAT CAN BE MADE CONSISTS OF OPERATING DETECTORS
AND WHERE APPLICABLE CHECKING FOR LINE LEAKAGE AT THE
CONTROL UNIT .
System Functions Checks
1202 Procedures may vary in detail according to the particular

system installed ; in general, however, a setting-to-work
sequence includes a number of functional checks to confirm
the following :
a . With power supplies connected, the power supply

indicator lamps are illuminated, showing that the
system is in the Standby condition .
b . Simulating a fire condition causes the Fire and

appropriate detection zone indicators to illuminate and
the alarm sounders to operate .
c. Initiating the Silence Alarm facility silences the

sounders while maintaining the visual Fire alarm
indications .
d . Following a fire condition, the system can be reset to

the Standby condition .
MODNES/602/2/1990 32

NES 602
Issue 2
e. Initiating the alarm Test facility raises the
appropriate visual and audible alarms .
f . Initiation of a fault in each monitored fault detection
circuit raises the appropriate visual and audible fault
indications .
g. Where applicable, Fire, detection zone (group) and

Fault indications are raised at the repeater unit(s) .
In addition, the setting-to-work procedure may require the
metering of internal voltages at specific test points . Each
detector, callpoint and, where applicable, end-of-line unit
must be functionally tested, silencing alarms and resetting
the system as necessary .
Detector Functional Tests
1203 To check that an ion-chamber smoke detector is capable of

operating a fire condition can be simulated by means of a
detector aerosol tester, THORN SECURITY SC 517 .001 .001 NSN
4240-99-543-1303 . When testing low voltage detectors an
aerosol adaptor, TSL SC 517 .001 .164 is to be used . As soon
as existing stocks of this aerosol are exhaussted they will
be replaced by a new one, TSL SC 517 .001 .185 (still to be
codified) . This aerosol tester can be used for both ion-
chamber and photo-electric smoke detectors . The new adaptor
for this aerosol is TSL SC 517 .001 .186 . Where detectors are
connected to either a VCS255 or 256 or T868 control panel
firing voltages can be checked by using the test facilities
built into the panels . Where smoke tests are required, a
smoke generator of the metallic tetrachloride type is not to
be used, as harmful corrosive products can be formed inside
the detector head, drastically reducing its effectiveness .
1204 Heat-sensitive rate-of-rise detector heads can be activated

by means of a heat source, such as an electric hair dryer,
held approximately 500mm from the detector head, the heat
source being immediately removed on raising an alarm . A
NAKED FLAME MUST NOT BE USED, AS PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE
DETECTOR MAY RESULT .
MODNES/602/2/1990 33

NES 602
Issue 2
1205 The infra-red flame detector head can be tested by using a

light source flashing at approximately 10Hz .
Fire Tests
WARNING : A FIRE TEST MUST NOT BE CARRIED OUT IN AN AREA DEEMED

TO BE A 'HAZARDOUS AREA' OR WHERE THERE IS A DANGER OF
FIRE SPREAD .
1206 Where fire tests are specified the following procedures must
be carried out under two basically different conditions :
a. Ventilation system operating at minimum level

(simulating port conditions) .
b . Ventilation system fully operational (simulating sea

conditions) .
1207 Place a steel tray 300mm square x 150mm deep within the test
area in the position designated by the Ministry of Defence
Quality Assurance Representative . Loosely spread 500 grammes
of textile waste in the tray and impregnate it with 0 .25
litre of clean diesel fuel .
1208 Warn personnel that fire tests are about to commence and
ensure that adequate fire fighting apparatus and assistance
is close to hand .
1209 Light the test fire . Detection must occur within 3 minutes
for smoke and infra red flame detectors . (Tests on rate-of-
rise heat detectors can only be carried out as stated in
Clause 1204) . The area affected must be correctly indicated
at the control unit .
NOTE : Smoke bombs and other artificial means of generating

smoke must not be used to test the effectiveness of a
smoke detection system. As no heat is generated by
these devices no thermal lift is generated and
therefore the smoke movement will not be characteristic
of a true fire .
MODNES/602/2/1990 34

NES 602
Issue 2
Callpoint Tests'
1210 ZF121 and WSB117A Callpoints :
Opening the front cover of the callpoint releases the switch

actuator, raising the alarm . Closing the front cover
returns the switch to the normal position .
1211 CP200 Series Callpoints :
Each callpoint is supplied complete with a test key . When

the test key is inserted into a small hole on the side of
the callpoint it raises the glass and the switch operates
raising the alarm . When the test key is removed the glass
returns to the normal position .
End-of-line Test Units
1212 The function of each unit can be checked by operating the

push button switch on the front face, causing the associated
indicator to be illuminated, thereby indicating that line
continuity is maintained .
Sounders
1213 All sounders employed, where possible, must be capable of

being heard above the ambient noise level within the
protected space and its environs .
High Intensity Warning Indicators
1214 High intensity warning indicators must be visible either

directly or by reflection in all parts of the protected
space .
MODNES/602/2/1990 35

NES 602
Issue 2
This page is intentionally blank
MODNES/602/2/1990 36

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEX A
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM
Introduction
1 . Individual items of equipment described in subsequent

Annexes of this NES can form part of an automatic fire
detection system . This Annex is an introduction and
describes a typical system .
Function
2 . Automatic fire detection systems are capable of sensing an

outbreak of fire at the earliest stage of combustion . A
typical system (Fig Al) contains zones (groups) of detectors
and callpoints, each detection zone (group) being connected
to the common alarm circuit of a control unit . When a
detector or callpoint is operated, the alarm circuit is
completed and a visual fire warning is given at the control
unit together with audible warning by strategically placed
sounder devices .
3 . Because it presents vital fire information, the control unit

is usually located on the Bridge in small ships or at the
Damage Control Centre in Frigates and above .
4 . The control unit functions as the principal junction of the

alarm wiring and signalling system . Electrical power is
introduced into the system at the control unit, which may
incorporate a battery charger or power change over unit
which automatically switches in the ship's 24V dc supply in
the event of a mains failure . Additionally, power may enter
the system at other positions for the operation of alarm
sounders .
5. In addition to the displays and warnings already mentioned,

the control unit may operate repeater units and/or mimic
panels that repeat the control unit Fire and Fault
indication and give the location of the protected area
affected by fire .
MODNES/602/2/1990 37 ANNEX A

NES 602
Issue 2
Detection Circuit
6 . A detection circuit comprises the electric connection of any

mix of a number of bases for smoke and flame detectors, heat
detectors and break-glass callpoints and where appropriate
an end-of-line test unit or end-of-line resistor . The
detector bases and heat detectors may incorporate a neon or
LED indicator which operates when a detector goes into
alarm . Where required these indicators can be extended away
from the detector to provide remote indication of a detector
going into alarm . Typical HV detection circuits are shown
in Fig A2 and a typical LV detection circuits are shown in
Fig A3 .
7. Certain systems, eg Versatile Console System (VCS) and Fire

Detection System Type T868, incorporate an individual
detector electrical test facility to enable the functioning
of the circuit of each detector to be checked at a central
position, ie at the control unit, and end-of-line test units
or end-of-line resistors are not required . Detectors in
these systems do not incorporate detector base indicators
(Figs A2 b and c) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX A 38

NES 602
Issue 2
DETECTION 10 PROCESSING 10- ALARM

EXTERNAL
FLASHING INDICATORS
END-OF-LINE CALL -
TEST UNIT POINTG
DETECTORS
OTHER DETECTION
ZONES (GROUPS)
REPEATER UNIT(S)
110-240 Vac
50 - 60 Hz
AUXILIARY SERVICES
CONTROL (eg DOOR RELEASE,
UNIT' VENTILATION SHUT -DOWN)
AUDIBLE ALARMS)
SHIPS 24Vdc
SUPPLY OR RELAY I
BATTERY & UNIT
CHARGER VISUAL ALARM(S)
FIG Al TYPICAL FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM - BLOCK DIAGRAM

NES 602
Issue 2
CALLPOINT DETECTOR BASE LAST DETECTOR BASE

WITH INDICATOR (NON-INDICATING)
EXTENDED INDICATOR
TO
CONTROL
UNIT
(a) HV DETECTION CIRCUIT
DETECTOR DETECTOR LAST DETECTOR
TO
CONTROL
UNIT
(b) HV DETECTION CIRCUIT WITH TEST CONNECTIONS
DETECTOR DETECTOR LAST DETECTOR
TO
CONTROL
UNIT
(c) T868 DETECTION CIRCUIT WITH TEST CONNECTIONS
FIG A2 TYPICAL HV DETECTION CIRCUITS
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX A 40

NES 602
Issue 2
BREAK GLASS
DETECTOR LAST DETECTOR
CALLPOINT
END-OF-LINE
TO
RESISTOR
CONTROL
UNIT
(a) LV DETECTION CIRCUIT (F700 SERIES)
BREAK GLASS
DETECTOR LAST DETECTOR
CALLPOINT
END-OF-LINE
RESISTOR
TO
CONTROL
UNIT
REMOTE LED
(INTEGRAL LED IS IN THE DETECTOR HEAD)
(b) LV DETECTION CIRCUIT (M300 SERIES)
FIG A3 TYPICAL LV DETECTION CIRCUITS

NES 602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX A 42

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEX B
DETECTOR HEADS
,Ion Chamber Smoke Detector Heads Types F35, F36, F712M, F712 EX
and MF300 Series
NOTE : A MARKER PLATE WITH THE TREFOIL SYMBOL MUST BE MOUNTED

ADJACENT TO ALL ION-CHAMBER SMOKE DETECTOR HEADS
Function
1 . The ion chamber smoke detector head is capable of detecting

the aerosols from a smouldering or open fire . Owing to
convection, the greatest concentration of aerosols forms
most quickly at the deckhead, where the detector head is
normally mounted .
2. If the fire is only smouldering, there is less convection,
or none at all, and the aerosols are diffused throughout the
space, eventually reaching sufficient concentration for
detection at the deckhead .
3 . Where aerosols are likely to be carried by the airflow in
air conditioning and ventilation exhaust ducts, probe units
incorporating suitable ion chamber smoke detector heads may
be used . (see Annex D)
4 . On board ship, detector heads are always housed in deckhead

mountings, or probe units as appropriate .
5. Ion chamber smoke detector heads, Types F35, F36 (Fig BI
refers) are identified, according to sensitivity, by a
coloured disc on the central boss of the detection chamber
and are coded as follows :
Increased sensitivity (red spot) coded A, eg Type F35A .
Normal sensitivity (yellow spot) coded B (normally supplied

for RN ships) .
Reduced sensitivity (blue spot) coded C .
MODNES/602/2/1990 43 ANNEX B

NES 602
Issue 2
6. The F712M and F712 EX Ion chamber smoke detector heads are
only supplied with normal sensitivity setting .
7 . The MF301 ion chamber smoke detector heads can be supplied

in any of the three sensitivities referred to in 5 above .
They can also incorporate a response delay circuit . Details
are given in Table B1 in this Annex .
Detector Heads Tvpe F35 and F36
FIG B1 ION-CHAMBER SMOKE DETECTOR HEADS TYPE F35 & F36
8 . Detector heads Type F35 fit detector bases arranged to

display a flashing signal by means of an integral or
externally mounted neon indicator, to show where detection
has occurred . (In certain applications, eg when connected to
control unit type T864 Mk 2 for use in hazardous areas, this
detector head is mounted in a detector base with no flashing
indicator) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 44

NES 602
Issue 2
9. Detector heads Type F36 fit detector bases having no

flashing indicators, and are used with control units that do
not have the necessary circuit to operate neon indicators .
Operation of Detectors
10 . Entry of aerosols into the detector head slows down the flow
of ions within the detection chamber, thus raising the
voltage at the junction between the detection and reference
chambers . This rise in voltage fires a cold cathode tube
whose anode current operates a relay circuit, in the
associated control unit, which triggers visual and audible
alarms . The principle of operation is described in detail
in BR6521(104) .
11 . a . HT Voltage 220V dc nominal
b. Standby current : 2 .5 x 10 -9A
c . Alarm current : 10mA maximum
d. Sensitivity ranges : Increased A : 13 to 22V
eg Type F35A
Normal B : 16 to 33V
Reduced C : 33 to 43V
e. Environmental Limits :
Temperature : -20°C to +70 °C

Relative Humidity : 10% to 95%
f. Weight : 255gm

NES 602
Issue 2
12 . THORN SECURITY Stock Code Numbers allocated to the

Types F35, F36 detector heads variants are as follows :
NO . THORN SECURITY SC,
F35A (T) 516-002-007
F35B (T) (NSN 4210-99-542-2133) 516-002-008
F35C (T) (NSN 4210-99-755-9912) 516-002-009
F36B (T) (NSN 4210-99-519-3462) 516-002-010
Setting to Work
Detector firina voltage tests
13 . As the performance of every detector head is

susceptible to changes of temperature and humidity it
should be allowed to 'soak' in its environment for at
least 24 hours prior to commencing triggering tests .
The trigger voltage limits for the various detector

sensitivities are :
High - Type F35A detector head : 13-22V
Normal Types F35B and F36B detector heads :

16-33V
Reduced - Type F35C detector head : 33-43V

If the detector trigger voltage recorded is outside the
limits stated, suspect environmental causes . Carry out
checks at regular intervals over a period of 48 hours .
If the trigger voltage still does not materially
change, replace the detector head with a known
correctly functioning one from a previously tested area
and leave it in situ for a further 24 hours . Re-check
the trigger voltage . If the voltage is similar to that
recorded for the suspect detector head, the problems
are environmental . If the voltage is now within the
limits, the original detector head must be faulty and
should be returned to stores suitably labelled .
NOTE : Voltage adjustments must not be carried out by ship's
staff .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 46

NES 602
Issue 2
14 . Whenconnected to control ecuipment with built-in
triggering facility (ea VCS) : Carry out triggering
tests in the manner laid down in the Annex appropriate
to the control unit, eg VCS (Annex H) and Type T868
(Annex M) .
15 . When connected to control equipment with no built-in

triaaerina facility (eg T870 Mk2) : Using a THORN
SECURITY portable test set SC No 590-001-005, carry out
the triggering tests as follows :
a . Plug the test head into the test set socket

and lock it in position .
b . Remove the detector head from its base and

insert it in the combined plug and socket at
the end of the test head .
c . Turn bias control knob on the test set fully

anti-clockwise .
d . Insert the plug and socket with detector

fitted, into the detector base . If voltage is
being applied to the detector lines from the
control unit, it will illuminate the neon
indicator on the test set .
e . Set the switch position on the test set to
"HT Volts" and record the voltmeter reading .
f. Set the switch position to 'bias for Types

F35/36 detector heads .
g. Turn the bias control knob slowly clockwise,

continuously observing the voltmeter, until
triggering of the detector causes the meter
needle to suddenly drop back . Note the peak
voltage obtained and check that the neon
indicator also extinguishes on triggering the
detector . The trigger voltage must be at the
low end of the sensitivity limits for the
type of detector .

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Heads Tvpe F712M and F712 EX
FIG B2 ION CHAMBER SMOKE DETECTOR HEADS TYPE F712M AND F712 EX
16 . Detector heads type F712M fit detector bases arranged to

display a signal by means of an integral (base type UK70R)
or externally mounted (base type UK 72R) red L .E .D . to show
which detector has gone into an alarm condition .
17 . Detector heads type F712 EX can be installed in compartments
which are classified as hazardous, such as magazines and LOX
stores, provided that a THORN SECURITY intrinsically safe
barrier system 601 is wired into the circuit before it
enters the hazardous area . These detector heads also fit
detector bases arranged to display a signal by means of an
integral (base type UK70EX) or externally mounted (base type
UK 72 EX) red L .E .D . (see Clause 0524) .
Operation
18 . The F712M and F712EX detectors work on the same principle as

the F35 and F36 detectors except that the cold cathode tube
has been replaced by solid state circuit (see Paragraph 10
of this Annex) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 48

NES 602
Issue 2
19 . a. Operating Voltage 20V dc nominal

b. Quiescent current 100 uA
c. Alarm current 100 mA
d. Environmental Limits :
Temperature -100C to 600C
Humidity up to 95%
(non condensing)
e. Weight 90gm
20 . THORN SECURITY stock code numbers are :
F712M (NSN 4210-99-732-3489 516-012-010

and 4210-99-768-1561)
F712EX (NSN 4210-99-736-4962
and 4210-99-725-0847) 516-012-011
Setting to Work
21 . After checking the detector circuit wiring put the control

unit into the test mode . Remove the continuity plug from the
detector base and plug in the detector . Check that the
detector functions correctly using the smoke detector
aerosol tester (Clause 1203) the LED will come on to
indicate when the detector operates (check the remote
indicator if fitted) . With the control unit in the test mode
the detector will re-set after a few seconds so the next
detector can be plugged in without having to go back to the
control unit to re-set and none of the audible alarms will
operate . After all the detectors have been installed the
control unit must be returned to its normal state ie : the
test mode is cancelled, as a genuine alarm cannot override
the test mode .

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Heads Type MF301 And MF301EX
20 SLOTS
EQUI-SPACED
AROUND COVER
FIG B3 ION CHAMBER SMOKE DETECTOR HEADS TYPE MF301 AND MF301EX
22 . Detector heads type MF301 fit into detector bases type M300
(see Annex C Fig C18 for assembly details) . The detector
heads have an integral red LED to indicate which detector
has gone into alarm . If the detector is not normally
visible ie : in a locked compartment, a remote LED is .t o be
fitted . The standard M300 base is supplied with terminals
for remote LED connections .
23 . Detector heads type MF301EX can be installed in compartments
stores, provided that a THORN SECURITY Intrinsically Safe
Barrier System 601 is wired into the circuit before it
enters the hazardous area . A detector base M300EX is to be
used with these detectors . The MF300EX detectors have an
integral red LED and a remote LED can be fitted if required
(see Clause 0524) .
Operation
24 . The MF301 and MF301EX detectors work on the same principle

as the F35 and F36 detectors except that the cold cathode
tube has been replaced by solid state circuitry . (see
Paragraph 10 of this Annex) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 50

NES 602
Issue 2
Environmental
25 . a. Operating Temperature -20°C to +70 °C

(see note)
b. Storage Temperature -25 ° C to +800C
c. Relative Humidity 95% non-condensing

d. EMF/RFI Exceeds requirements
of BS6667 :Pt 3
Security Level 3
[10v/m 0 .1MHz to 500
MHz]
NOTE : Operation below 0 ° C is not recommended unless steps are taken
to eliminate condensation and hence ice formation on the
detector .
Electrical Characteristics
26 . a. Operating Voltage 20Vdc nominal

b. Quiescent Current 100 uA
c. Switch on surge zero
d. Stabilization Time 20 sec
e. Alarm current 25mA
f. Alarm current (ex type) 20mA
DESIGNATION RESPONSE DELAY IDENTIFICATION THORN SECURITY

sec . COLOUR STOCK CODE NO .
MF301H 5 RED 516-020-005

MF301DH 20 RED 516-020-006
MF301 5 WHITE 516-020-002
MF301D 20 WHITE 516-020-004
MF301EX 5 WHITE 516-020-003
MF301L 5 BLUE 516-020-001
H . High Sensitivity
D . Delayed Response
EX . Intrinsically Safe
L . Low Sensitivity
TABLE B1 LIST OF THE MF301 RANGE OF DETECTORS

NES 602
Issue 2
NOTE : The MF300 range of detectors have been specifically

designed not to give false alarms when subjected to
draughts or gusts of wind .
In general, in areas where continuous forced

ventilation exists, it is recommended that :
a . only high sensitivity [H] detectors be fitted

where the air flow exceeds 4m/s
b . standard sensitivity detectors be fitted where the

air speed is less than 4m/s and,
c . low sensitivity detectors only be fitted where the

air speed is less than 2m/s .
Setting to Work
27 . The method of setting to work of the MF301 series of

detectors the same as for the detector type F712M . For
details see Paragraph 21 of this Annex .
Photo-electric Smoke Detector Heads Tvne MR301 and MR301 EX
Function
28 . The photo-electric optical smoke detector detects visible

particles produced in fires by using the light scattering
properties of the particles . All detectors in the range use
the same optical system which is shown diagramatically in
Fig B4 .
FIG B4 MR300 DETECTOR RANGE OPTICAL SYSTEM
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 52

NES 602
Issue 2
29 . If the fire is only smouldering, there is less convection,

or none at all and the particles are diffused throughout the
space, eventually reaching sufficient concentration for
detection at the deckhead .
30 . Where particles are likely to be carried by the airflow in

air conditioning and ventilation exhaust ducts, probe units
incorporating suitable photo-electric smoke detector heads
may be used (see Annex D) .
31 . On board ship, detector heads are always in deckhead

mountings or probe units as appropriate .
32 . The MR301 photo-electric smoke detector heads can be
supplied in any of three sensitivities . Details are given in
Table B2 in this Annex .
30 SLOTS (4mm)
EQUi-SPACED
AROUND COVER
FIG B5 PHOTO-ELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR HEADS TYPE MR301

AND MR301EX

NES 602
Issue 2
33 . Detector heads type MR301 fit into detector bases type M300
(see Annex C Fig C18 for assembly details) . The detector
heads have an integral red LED which flashes every 10s to
indicate that the Emitter is operating . When the detector
goes into alarm the LED becomes steady . If the detector is
not normally visible ie : in a locked compartment, a remote
LED is to be fitted . The standard M300 base is supplied
with terminals for remote LED connections .
34 . Detector heads type MR301EX can be installed in compartments

stores, provided that a THORN SECURITY Intrinsically Safe
enters the hazardous area . A detector base M300EX is to be
used with these detectors . As with the MR301 the MR301EX
has a red LED which normally flashes and becomes steady if
the detector goes into an alarm condition . Remote LEDs can
be fitted if required . (see Clause 0524) .
Operation,
35 . The optical system consists of an emitter and sensor, with a

lens in front of each, so arranged that their optical axes
cross in the sampling volume . The emitter, with its lens,
produces a narrow beam of light which is prevented from
reaching the sensor by the baffles . (see Fig B4) .
36 . The emitter is a Gallium Arsenide (GaAs) solid state type

operating at a wavelength of 0 .94nm ; the sensor is a silicon
photodiode . These devices with their associated lenses are
held within the optical array which also provides the
baffles . The design of this assembly is such that the
presence of very small insects (eg thrips) will not cause
false alarms .
37 . The Sampling Volume is enclosed within a measuring chamber

formed by conical labyrinth mouldings . The optical design
of the chamber provides a very low background signal in
clean air conditions even when the chamber is contaminated
by white dust . This high tolerance to dust is improved even
further by an aerodynamic design which encourages dust
settlement to occur on the less critical optical surfaces .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 54

NES 602
Issue 2
38 . The GaAs emitter is pulsed every 10s in order to reduce its

power consumption . The pulse signal, as received by the
silicon photodiode, is fed to a high gain amplifier . If
smoke is present, the pulse signal received varies in
proportion to the smoke density . The output of the amplifier
is thus proportional to the smoke density .
39 . The amplifier output is fed to a pulse height discriminator

which compares the signal with a preset threshold level .
Sophisticated synchronous detection techniques are used to
eliminate virtually all the effects of noise and spurious
transients .
40 . If the signal amplitude exceeds the threshold level then the
emitter pulse period is reduced to 2s . The pulse period
remains at 2s if the signal is above threshold . When the
counter has counted three consecutive pulses above, the
threshold, the output stage is latched into the alarm
condition . If, however, the amplitude of the second or third
pulse is below threshold, then the pulse period reverts to
10s and the counter resets .
41 . The switching of the output stage lights the integral alarm
indicator (LED) and provides drive for an external (remote)
LED indicator .
42 . The operation of the MR301EX detector is the same as that of
the standard MR300 range detector . Circuits are modified,
however, to ensure that safety is maintained under normal
conditions and with up to two zone circuit faults .
Environmental
43 . a. Operating Temperature -20°C to +70 ° C

(see note)
b. Storage Temperature -25°C to +80 °C
c. Relative Humidity 95% non-condensing
d. EMC/RFI Exceeds requirements
of BS6667 :Pt3
security level
3[10v/m - 0 .1MHz to
500HMz] .

NES 602
Issue 2
NOTE : Operation below O TC is not recommended unless steps are

taken to eliminate condensation and hence ice formation
on the detector .
44 . a. Operating voltage 20 Vdc nominal

c. Switch on surge 100 uA
d. Stabilization time 30 sec
e. Alarm current 25 mA
f. Alarm current (ex type) 20 mA
DETECTOR RESPONSE THRESHOLD IDENTIFICATION THORN SECURITY

TYPE VALUE COLOUR STOCK CODE NO .
dB/m %/m
MR301H 0 .12 2 .7 RED 516-021-004

MR301 0 .17 3 .8 WHITE 516-021-002
MR301EX' 0 .17 3 .8 WHITE 516-021-003
MR301L 0 .27 6 .0 BLUE 516-021-001
TABLE B2 LIST OF MR301 RANGE OF DETECTORS
Setting to Work
45 . The method of setting to work of the MR301 series of

detectors is as the same as for the detector type F712M . For
details see Paragraph 21 of this Annex .
Infra Red Flame Detector Heads Tvpe F70 . S610 and MS302EX
Function
46 . The infra-red flame detector responds only to infra-red

radiation together with the flicker frequency of flame and
is used where there are materials likely to produce flame at
the earliest stage of a fire . Since its operation depends on
direct radiation, it must be sited where it can overlook the
whole of the area that is to be protected .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 56

NES 602
Issue 2
47 . In order to distinguish flame from sunlight or artificial

light, undulation of the radiation is utilized so that only
flickering frequencies of approximately 12Hz will lead to an
alarm . Moreover, the flicker frequency has to be maintained
for a certain period of time . Thus the possibility of
alarm either from a constant source of infra red or
transient flickering phenomena is virtually eliminated .
48 . The type F70 detector head (Fig B8 refers) is

interchangeable and compatible with type F35 detector heads .
It can initiate a flashing signal, generated at the control
equipment, to indicate that it has fired .
49 . The F70 is now obsolete and as the circuitry is encapsulated
with a potting compound, faulty units cannot be repaired .
50 . THORN SECURITY have developed a F70 replacement kit (Fig B6)

SC No . 516-006-011 . The kit comprises of a HV/LV adaptor, a
5610 LV infra red flame detector, deckhead mounting and
protective cage . When being installed the existing deckhead
mounting is retained and the HV/LV adaptor plugs in to the
existing base, in place of the F70, and the new deckhead
mounting is installed as close to the existing one as
possible .

NES 602
Issue 2
2S6
DECKHEAD
MOUNTING .
EXISTING
MOUNTING .
(TYPE MAY
VARY ).
FSK 6
TERMINAL
BASE .
S610 INFRA-
RED FLAME
DETECTOR
FIGURE 1
111
OR HVtLV
ADAPTOR
I
MSK CAGE
RED
110 .4
4b0
06
FIG B6 F70 REPLACEMENT KIT (S610)
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 58

NES 602
Issue 2
OHM7
DECK HEAD
MOUNTING.
EXISTING
MOUNTING.
(TYPE MAY
VARY1
M 300
TERMINAL
BASE BASE.
MS 302 INFRA-
RED FLAME
DETECTOR.
HVILV
ADAPTOR
11 I
BLACK
M 300 TERMINAL
BASE CONNECTION
DETAILS .
FIG B7 F70 REPLACEMENT KIT (MS302)

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Head Type F70 (see paragraph 49 and 50) .
FIG B8 DETECTOR HEAD TYPE F70
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 60

NES 602
Issue 2
Operation
51 . The detector head reacts to the modulated radiation

emanating from flames at the speed of light . Radiation
reaching the detector head is projected onto a
photoelectric cell through a convex lens, which admits
only infra-red light . The voltage generated is
amplified and is used to fire a cold cathode tube . The
resulting anode current operates a relay circuit, in
the associated control unit, which triggers visual and
audible alarms .
52 . a. HT voltage : 220V dc nominal

b. Standby current : 45 uA
c. Alarm current : 10mA maximum
d. Sensitivity settings : 3 sec delay A
10 sec delay B
30 sec delay C
e. Environmental limits : Temperature -30 0C
to +50 0C
Relative Humidity :
up to 95%
f. Weight : 390 gm
53 . THORN SECURITY Stock Code Numbers allocated to the type
F70 detector head are :
THORN SECURITY SC NO
Type F70A 516-005-001
Type F70B 516-005-002
Type F70C 516-005-003
Settinct to Work
54 . Follow the setting to work procedure in clauses 1205

and 1206 .

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Head Tvne S610
FIG B9 INFRA RED FLAME DETECTOR TYPE S610
55 . The detector head type S610 fits into detector base

type UK6(R) which in turn fits into base enclosure type
ZS6 . Protective cage type MSK can be fitted if
required . An indicator is mounted in the base which
illuminates when the detector goes into an alarm
condition .
Operation
56 . The detector head reacts to the infra red radiation

emitted by flickering flames . Infra red radiation
striking the pyro-electrical sensor generates an
electrical signal which is evaluated by the detector
electronics . If a defined threshold is exceeded for
specific period the detector signals an alarm to the
control unit . In an alarm condition the detector
response indicator lights up .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 62

NES 602
Issue 2
57 . a. Operating voltage 20 Vdc nominal
b . Quiescent current 130 uA
c . Alarm current 100 mA
d. Sensitivity settings
The detector is fitted with a three position
switch which enables the commissioning engineer to
set the delay period to : 3 sec, 10 sec (normal) or
30 sec .
e . Operating temperature -200C to +70 °C
f . Relative humidity 95% non condensing
58 . Stock Code Numbers
NSN THORN SECURITY

S610 4210-99-780-9982 516-006-010
Setting to Work
59 . After checking the detector circuit wiring put the

control unit into the test mode . Set the switch on the
base of the detector to the required delay period
position and plug the detector into the base . To check
that the detector functions correctly use either a
spill or match and move gently in front of the lens to
ensure that the flame flickers . A hand torch can be
used by passing a hand rapidly in and out of the beam
to create a flicker effect . The response indicator will
light up when the detector goes into alarm . With the
control unit in the test mode the detector will re set
after a few seconds .
NOTE : The S610 infra red flame detector must not be used in
hazardous areas .

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Head Type MS302EX
60 . Detector heads type MS302EX can be used in hazardous (see

Clause 0524) or non hazardous areas . They fit into detector
bases type M300 in non hazardous areas and type M300E-X in
hazardous areas . (see Annex C Fig C18 for assembly details) .
The detector head has an integral red LED to indicate which
detector has gone into alarm . If the detector is not
normally visible ie : in a locked compartment a remote LED is
to be fitted . Both the M300 and the M300EX bases are
supplied as standard with terminals for remote LED
connections . When a MS302EX is fitted in a hazardous area
a THORN SECURITY Intrinsically Safe Barrier System 601 must
be wired into the circuit before it enters the area .
LED
FIG B10 INFRA RED FLAME DETECTOR TYPE MS302EX
Operation
61 . The MS302E% detectors work on the same principle as the
S610 detectors . (see Paragraph 56 of this Annex)
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 64

NES 602
Issue 2
Environmental
62 . a Operating temperature -10°C to +60°C

b Storage temperature -30°C to +80 ° C
c Relative humidity 95% non condensing
d RFI to BS6667 :Pt3
(10v/m @ 100k Hz to
500 MHz) .
NOTE : Operation below 0 °C is not recommended unless steps are

taken to eliminate condensation and hence ice formation
on the detector .
63 . a . Operating voltage 20V dc nominal

b . Quiescent current 100 uA
c . Switch on surge limited by circuit
duration < 500 us
d. Stabilization time 20 sec
e . Alarm current 20 mA nominal
f. Reset time 2 sec
Setting to Work
64 . After checking the detector circuit wiring put the

control unit into the test mode . Remove the continuity
plug from the detector base and plug in the detector .
To check that the detector functions correctly use
either a spill or match and move gently in front of the
lens to ensure the flame flickers . A hand torch can be
used by passing a hand rapidly in and out of the beam
to create a flicker effect . If at the time of setting
to work the area has been classified as hazardous a
naked flame must not be used and the torch must be
certified flame proof . The detector has a 3s built in
time delay . The LED will illuminate when the detector
goes into alarm . With the control unit in the test
mode the detector will re-set after a few seconds .

NES 602
Issue 2
HeatSensitive Detector Heads F80 . D800 and MD300 Series
Operation
65 . Heat sensitive detector heads fall into two general

categories, those that respond to a rapid rate-of-rise in
temperature and those that operate when the temperature
reaches a pre determined level . The rate-of-rise type
detector also has a static (fixed temperature) sitting so
that even if the temperature is rising too slowly to be
detected as a rate-of-rise when it reaches a pre determined
level the detector will go into alarm .
66 . These detector heads are designed to be activated by heat

generated by a fire . Since they are sensitive to convected
heat, the detector head is normally mounted at the highest
points of the space that is to be protected .
67 . Heat sensitive detectors are normally only fitted in areas

where the normal day to day operation could cause smoke
detectors to give spuerious alarms such as in galleys,
pantries and laundries .
68 . If heat sensitive heat detectors are used for more general

fire detection, the rate of rise type are to be fitted as
they respond to a fast developing fire faster than the
static type particularly in high deckhead areas .
69 . Rate-of-rise heat detectors are not to be used in galleys as

a rapid rate of rise of temperature will occur at the
deckhead when oven doors are opened .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 66

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Heads Type F80, F81 and F82
rT

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG . B13 DETECTOR HEAD TYPE F82
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 68

NES 602
Issue 2
Function
70 . The detector head type F80 is of the compensated

bimetallic spiral type sensing element responsive to
rate-of-rise of temperature and to a fixed limit
temperature, irrespective of rate of rise . The rate-of-
rise and maximum . temperature characteristics of the
F80BY comply with the requirements for a Grade 3 heat
detector to BS 5445 : Part 5 .
71 . The detector head type F81 works using the same

principle as the F80 but uses a different sensing
element .
72 . The detector head type F82 uses a static (fixed

temperature) sensing element .
73 . All three types of detector head are interchangeable

and compatible with type F35, F36 and F70 detectors . On
F35 and F70 circuits they are plugged into detector
bases incorporating a neon indicator which will flash
when the detector goes into alarm .
Operation
74 . When the contacts of the sensing element close, the

voltage at the junction of a resistor network rises to
fire'a cold cathode tube whose anode current operates a
relay circuit in the associated control unit, which
triggers visual and audible alarms .
75 . a. HT voltage : 220V dc nominal

b. Standby current : 2 uA
c. Alarm current : 10mA maximum
d. Sensitivity settings : 57°C - type F80BY, F81BY
93 °C- type F80BZ, F81BZ
F82BZ .
e. Environmental limits : Temperature : - 10 0C to
+100°C
Relative humidity : 5% to
95%
Vibration 0 .1g over

50-60 Hz

NES 602
Issue 2
Stock Code Numbers
NSN THORN SECURITY

F80BY 516-008-019
F80BZ 4210-99-137-9466 516-008-020
F81BY 4210-99-768-8911 516-008-021
F81BZ 4210-99-543-0097 516-008-022
F82BZ 6685-99-791-2610 516-008-015
Settina to Work
76 . Follow the setting to work procedures in Clauses 1204
and 1206 .
77 . All of the F80 range of detectors are now obsolete .

78 . THORN SECURITY have developed a F80 replacement kit
(Fig B14) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 70

NES 602
Issue 2
TTK prn otT1CTw1 IA tawtCTOw6

0968001606
CONNECTION DETAILS
I MOUNTING PLATE SEALING RING

2 DETECTOR HOUSING 6 RETAINING COVER
3 DETECTOR BASE 7 'GUARD '
DETECTOR HEAD FIXING PLATE
ITEMS .3,5,6
.2 AND 7 EXISTING
1
ITEMS 4 AND 8 NEW .
EXPLODED VIEW
FIG B14 F80 REPLACEMENT KIT

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Heads TvDe D801, D802, D801EX and D802E X
11fikill
FIG B15 RATE-OF-RISE HEAT DETECTOR HEADS D800 SERIES
Operation
79 . The D800 range are solid state rate-of-rise heat

detectors . Being solid state they are not prone to
giving spurious alarm when subjected to vibration as is
the case with bi-metallic type .
80 . The sensing elements are negative temperature

coefficient thermistors in a bridge configuration as
shown in the block schematic of the detector circuit .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 72

NES 602
Issue 2
0 +ve
R1 - R4
NULL LATCH & ALARM

DETECTOR INDICATOR
DRIVE
I
R2 R6
T
0 0v
FIG B16 CIRCUIT BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RATE-OF-RISE DETECTOR HEAD
80 . The thermistors R1 and R4 are mounted in such a way

that the thermal time constant of R1, the sensing
thermistor, is shorter than that of R4, the reference
thermistor . If V 1 and V2 are the bridge voltages, the
values of R2 and R6 are chosen to make V 1 less than V2
when both thermistors are at the same temperature . If
the detector is subjected to an increasing temperature,
the temperature of R1 will rise more rapidly than that
of R4, and V 1 will therefore rise more rapidly than V 2 .
The comparator output changes state when V = V 2 making
the alarm threshold independent of the bridge supply
voltage .
81 . All four detectors in the range respond in the same way

to a sudden rate-of-rise in temperature . The D801 and
D801EX will go into alarm when the temperature reaches
60°C irrespective of the speed of rise in temperature,
and the D802 and D802EX will go into alarm when the
temperature reaches 102 ° C .
82 . Detector heads type D801EX and D802EX can be installed

in compartments which are classified as hazardous
provided that a THORN SECURITY Intrinsically Safe
enters the area (see Clause 0524) .
83 . The detector heads have an integral LED to indicate

which detector has gone into alarm .

NES 602
Issue 2
Environmental
84 . a . Storage temperature -20°c to +100 0C

b . Humidity 95% RH (continuous)
100% RH (short
periods)
85 . a. Supply voltage 10 to 22 V dc
b. Quiescent current 100 u.A
c. Alarm current 80 mA maximum
General
86 . The detectors have been designed to meet the

requirements for Grade 1 detectors in BS5445 Part 5 .
87 . Stock Code Numbers
NSN THORN SECURITY
D801 516-008-026
D801 EX 516-008-031
D801 with T880 pcb 4210-99-729-9044 516-008-033
D802 4210-99-782-3054 516-008-027
D802 EX 516-008-032
D802 with T880 pcb 4210-99-736-4958 516-008-034
The T880 pcb disables the detectors built in 7s gating

period and provides extended indication facility .
88 . Due to the great difficulty in obtaining thermistors

meeting the very fine tolerances required for this
detector THORN SECURITY have withdrawn it from the
market . The MD300 series of detector can be used as a
replacement (see this Annex) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 74

NES 602
Issue 2
Detector Heads MD300 Series
12 VANES
EQUI-SPACED
AROUND COVER
FIG B17 HEAT DETECTOR HEADS - MD300 SERIES

General
89 . MD300 series detector heads fit into detector base type

M300 (see Annex C Fig C18 for assembly details) . The
detector heads have an integral red LED to indicate
which detector has gone into alarm . If the detector is
not normally visible ie : in a locked compartment a
remote LED is to be fitted . The standard M300 base is
supplied with terminals for remote LED connection .
90 . MD300Ex series detector heads can be installed in
compartments which are classified as hazardous, such as
magaziness and LOX stores, provided that a THORN
SECURITY Intrinsically Safe Barrier System 601 is wired
into the circuit before it enters the hazardous area .
A detector base type M300E,X is to be used with these
detectors . The MD300EX detectors have an integral red
LED and remote LEDs can be fitted if required . (see
Clause 0524 .)
Operation
91 . The MD300 range of detectors includes both rate-of-rise

and static (fixed temperature) types . These detect
abnormal high rates-of-rises of temperature or
abnormally high temperatures respectively . The
operating principle of the rate of rise detectors is
the same as for the D800 series . For details see
Paragraph 80 of this Annex .

NES 602
Issue 2
92 . The static detectors are similar to the rate-of-rise
types except that the reference thermistor is replaced
by a fixed resistor . The detectors, therefore, no
longer respond to rate-of-rise of temperature . The
bridge components are chosen instead to cause the
comparator to change state when the sensing thermistor
reaches a pre-determined temperature irrespective of
the rate of change .
93 . Two temperature settings are available in the MD300
range to suit particular applications .
Environmental
94 . a . Storage temperature -200C to +90 0C

b . Relative humidity 95% non condensing
c. EMC/RFI exceeds requirements
of BS6667 severity
level 3/IOV/M ;O .1MHz
to 500MHz .
95 . a. Operating voltage 20V dc nominal
c. Switch on surge 200 uA
d. Stabilization time 50 u sec
e. Alarm current 25mA
f. Alarm current (Ex types) 20mA
DESIGNATION DESCRIPTION IDENTIFICATION THORN SECURITY

COLOUR STOCK CODE NO .
MD301 GRADE 1 GREEN 516-023-001
MD301EX GRADE 1 GREEN 516-023-002
INT'Y SAFE
MD303 GRADE 3 RED 516-023-003
MD303EX GRADE 3 RED 516-023-004
INT'Y SAFE
MD305 TEMP RANGE 2 BLUE 516-023-005
(98 C)
MD305EX TEM$ RANGE 2 BLUE 516-023-006
(98 C)
INT'Y SAFE
MD311 STATIC 60 C YELLOW 516-024-001
(GRADE 2)
MD312 STATIC 900C BROWN 516-024-002
TABLE B3 LIST OF THE MD300 RANGE OF DETECTORS

MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 76

NES 602
Issue 2
Setting to work
96 . Follow the setting to work procedures in Clause 1204 .
H Series Rate of Rise and Static (Fixed Temperature) Heat

Detectors
97 . Over the years THORN SECURITY have supplied a number of

detectors in this series and some of them may be found
on RN vessels . A number of them are now obsolete . The
following list includes obsolete detectors that may be
found on RN vessels together with the detector which
should now be used as a replacement . Details of the
replacement detectors are given later in this Annex .
a. H007 - 57 °C rate-of-rise heat detector used on HV

systems . No direct replacement use H600HV static heat
detectors .
NSN 4210-99-546-3211 TSL SC No 516-008-004
b . H008 - 1000C rate of rise heat detector used on HV

systems . No direct replacement - use H900 HV static
heat detector .
NSN 4210-99-546-3211 TSL SC No 516-008-005
c . H009 - 57 0C rate-of-rise heat detector used on LV

systems . Use MD301 rate of rise heat detector or H600
static heat detector .
TSL SC No 516-008-006
d . H010 - 100°C rate-of-rise heat detector used on LV

systems . Use MD305 rate-of-rise or H900 static heat
detector .
TSL SC No 516-008-007
e. H580 c/w T880 pcb 58 °C used with T880 series control

units . Use MD 311 or H 602 .
TSL SC No 516-014-011
f. H680 c/w T880 pcb 68 °C used with T880 series control

units . Use MD311 or H602 .
TSL SC No 516-014-012

NES 602
Issue 2
9- H930 c/w T880 pcb 93 °C used with T880 series control

units . Use MD312 or H902 .
NSN 4210-99-748-7310 TSL SC No 516-014-013
h . H580 c/w HV pcb used on HV systems . Use H600HV
TSL SC No 516-014-014
i . H680 c/w HV pcb used on HV systems . Use H600Hv .
TSL SC No 516-014-015 use H600HV .
j . H930 c/w HV pcb used on HV systems . Use H900HV .
TSL SC No 516-014-016 .
Static Heat Detectors-H600 and H900 Series
Function
98 . H600 and H900 series detectors are particularly suited

to areas with unsuitable environmental conditions for
smoke detectors, such as galleys, pantries and
laundries and areas of low intrinsic value .
99 . There are five different configurations of the detector

available in both temperature settings .
a . H600/H900 have no alarm LED indicating facility .
b . H601/H901 have the facility to drive a remote LED

alarm indicator .
c . H602/H902 have an integral LED alarm indicator .
d . H600/H900 HV for use on high voltage systems .
e . H604/H904 have an integral LED alarm indicator and

are for use in hazardous areas . These detectors
are fitted with a 390 ohm 2 .5 watt current
limiting resistor . This resistor enables them to
be classed as a simple apparatus which complies
with BS5345 Part 4 clause 6 .3 .3 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 78

NES 602
Issue 2
To meet these requirements the detectors must be

mounted on a DHM8 deckhead mounting (see Annex C for
details) and the THORN SECURITY stock code number for
these detectors includes for the supply of a DHM8 . No
BASEEFA certificate is required for their use in zone 1
or zone 2 environments but a THORN SECURITY
Intrinsically Safe Barrier System 601 must be wired
into the circuit before it enters the hazardous area .
There are also restrictions on the cable types and
lengths (see Clause 0524) .
100 . All configurations of the detector are supplied

complete with a protective cage to protect the heat
sensitive element .
FIG B18 STATIC HEAT DETECTOR HEADS H600/H900 SERIES
FIG B19 I S STATIC HEAT DETECTOR HEADS TYPE H604 AND H904

NES 602
Issue 2
Operation
101 . The H600 and H900 series heat detectors contain a heat
sensitive element which changes state at a pre-
determined temperature (60 °C and 90 ° C respectively)
thereby closing an electrical contact .
102 . They comply with the requirements for a Grade 3 heat

detector to European Standard EN54 Part 5 1977 .
103 . The detectors do not latch in alarm, and will reset to

normal (quiescent) state when the ambient temperature
drops .
Environmental
104 . a. Storage temperature -20°C to 100 °C

b . Humidity 100% RH (non
condensing)
c . Housing protection to IP 23
105 . a. Supply voltage up to 24V dc

b . Quiescent current zero
c . Alarm current limited by internal
390ohm or 560ohm
resistor .
Stock Code Numbers
106 . NSN THORN SECURITY
H600 516-014-017
H900 6685-99-793-6598 516-014-018
H602 516-014-019
H902 516-014-020
H601 516-014-021
H901 516-014-022
H600HV 516-014-023
H900HV 516-014-024
H604 516-014-025
H904 516-014-026
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX B 80

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEXC
DECKHEAD MOUNTINGS
Function
1. The deckhead mounting is fitted in overhead positions on

board ship to retain and protect a detector head .
Tvves DHM1, DHM2, DHM3, DHM5, DHM6 (BR6521 (203) refers)
Description
2 . The detector base is secured inside the detector housing by

two countersunk-head screws . With a detector head plugged
into the base and the guard screwed into the detector
housing, the retaining cover secures the detector head and
seats onto the sealing ring to exclude dust and moisture .
3 . As a safeguard against the effects of vibration, the guard

is locked in position by means of the set screw . A key,
Admiralty Pattern No 700B, is required to lock and unlock
the guard .
4. For cable entry, the detector housing is threaded lin dia 16

tpi for conduit or No 2 cable glands .
MODNES/602/2/1990 81 ANNEX C

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG C1 DECKHEAD MOUNTING - EXPLODED VIEW
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 82

NES 602
Issue 2
Dimensions and Weight
5. a. Dimensions : height 203mm, maximum width across housing

175mm
b. Weight : 3 .18kg (less detector head)
Fixing Centres
6 . The mounting plate has two limm dia holes, 140mm between
centres .
Detector Base Connections
7 . Detector base connections appropriate to type of

deckhead mounting and to the control units to which
they are connected are as follows :
Detector Base Used in Deckhead THORN SECURITY

Mounting SC No .
Fig C2 Type DHM1 517-001-057

(NSN 4210-99-758-3036)
Fig C3 Type DHM2 517-001-058

(NSN 6350-99-923-8579)
Fig C4 Type DHM3 517-001-059
Fig C5 Type DHM5 517-001-068

(NSN 4210-99-543-0206)
Fig C6 Type DHM6 517-001-069

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG C2 TYPE DHM1 DETECTOR BASE CONNECTIONS

. (NSN 4210-99-542-2135)
BASE
FIXING HOLE
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 84
NES 602
Issue 2
INCOMING PAIR FROM CONTROL UNIT OR

PREVIOUS DETECTOR IN ZONE (GROUP)
POSITIVE WIRES


NES 602
Issue 2
Cl
FIG C6 TYPE DHM6 - DETECTOR BASE CONNECTIONS
8. These deckhead mountings are used as follows :
Tvpe DHM1, (NSN4210-99-542-2139) : used for detectors

connected directly to a Control Unit Type T870
or Type T865 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 86

NES 602
Issue 2
Tvpe DHM2 (NSN6350-99-923-8579) : used for detectors

connected directly to a VCS Fire Detection Unit Type
255 or Type 256 .
Tvte DHM3 : used for detectors connected directly to a

Control Unit Type T864 .
,Type DHM5 (NSN4210-99-543-0206) : used for detectors

connected via an Interface Unit Type T867 to a Control
Unit Type T870 .
Tvpe DHM6 : used for detectors connected directly to a

Control Unit type T868 or via an Interface Unit Type
T867 to a VCS Fire Detection Unit Type 255 or Type 256 .
Setting to Work
9 . This is dependent on the type of detector fitted and

follows the procedures laid down in Annex B .
Deckhead Mounting For Flame Detector Tvpe S610,
FIG C7 S610 DECKHEAD MOUNTING-EXPLODED VIEW

NES 602
Issue 2
P--
EXTENDED t
INDICATOR r'
(WHEN FITTED) L-
YE -YE
TERMINAL BASE DETAIL

REF : ITEM C
FIXING DETAILS
REF : ITEM 0
FIG C8 FIXING AND CONNECTION DETAILS
ITEM UNIT NSN THORN SECURITY STOCK CODE

A MSK 4210-99-736-4954 517-001-146
B S610 4210-99-780-9982 516-006-010
C UK6R 5999-99-777-8371 517-001-110
D ZS6 5340-99-777-8372 517-001-145
Deckhead Mountina Tvpe DHM7

General
10 . The DHM7 is the basic deckhead mounting housing which can be

used with all low voltage detectors . As with the high
voltage deckhead mounting housing, various different bases
and adaptors can be fitted to the DHM 7 to suit the various
types of detector .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 88

NES 602
Issue 2
in I 39 .5
i 1-1 1
---~ r r L----, I'
i
128 .5PCD FIXINGCENTRES
145 .3DIa
1
CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS
EARTHING POINT
ALIGNMENT ARROW
DETECTOR BASE
MOUNTING POINT
DECKNEAD
MOUNTING POINT
FIG C9 DECKHEAD MOUNTING TYPE DHM7

NES 602
Issue 2
11 . The arrow in the DHM7 is used as a guide when installing the

mounting . One of the arrow heads should be pointing in the
direction from which the LED indicator on the detector or
detector base can be most easily seen, normally pointing
towards the door leading into a compartment .
Deckhead Mountings TvDe DHM70R and DHM72R
12 . Thesee deckhead mountings are used with F712M ion-chamber

smoke detectors which are connected to a control unit which
monitors the detector group wiring for a short circuit fault
such as the T880 .
13 . The DHM70R consists of a DHM7, two 20mm cable glands and

locking nuts and a UK70R detector base, and is used where an
extended indicator is not required .
14 . The DHM72R consists of a DHM7, three 20mm cable glands and

locking nuts and a UK72R detector base, and is used where an
extended indicator is to be fitted .
Deckhead Mountings TvDe DHM70EX and DHM72EX
15 . These deckhead mountings are used with F712EX intrinsically

safe ion-chamber smoke detectors which are connected to a
control unit which monitors the detector group wiring for a
short circuit fault such as the T880 .
16 . Both deckhead mountings consist of a DHM7 and 20mm cable

glands and locking nuts . The detector bases are UK70EX and
UK72E X respectively . The DHM70EX is used where no extended
indicator is required and the DHM72EX is used where an
extended indicator is to be fitted .
Protective Caae Tvve DHMC
17 . The DHMC can be fitted to the DHM70 range of deckhead

mountings to provide limited physical protection against
damage to the detector head and to increase protection
against damage from the effects of shock .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 90

NES 602
Issue 2
VN7 ILS( MUM( lYllx 0>

3
IOICd A` llSOlu(O (AUN
CDY IYOIIT IL*MIOAL
FIG C10 DECKHEAD MOUNTING TYPE DHM70R/DHM72R
ALIERHATIYE CAB(
~~GLA80 POS1110US
OETECTOR BASE UX7OR
ELI .
-Yf IF.
FITTED - VE
44E
+YE
NOTE:
DOUBLE-HEADED ARROW ON INSIDE OF. ITEM A(DHM7) SHOWS THE POSITION
THE INDICATOR ON ITEM B (TERM. BASE). WILL . B E RELATIVE TO THE FIXING
FOR ITEM A .
FIG Cll CONNECTION AND FIXING DETAILS FOR DHM70R/DHM72R
NES 602
Issue 2
TERMINAL BASE
UK70 EX/UK 72 EX
NOTE: BOTH DETECTOR & TERMINAL BASE CARRY

PRINTED BASEEFA CERTIFICATION DATA
FIG C12 DECKHEAD MOUNTING TYPE DHM70EX/DHM72EX
ALIERNAIIVE CABLE
GLAND P05111015
! K! 5mm .
I HOLES
0
V
O
UK70Ex UK72 Ex
NOTE-
DOUBLE-HEADED ARROW ON INSIDE OF. ITEM A IDHM7) SHOWS THE . POSITION
THE INDICATOR ON ITEM 8 (TERM. BASE). WILL. BE RELATIVE TO THE FDCRIG
FOR ITEM A.
FIG C13 CONNECTION AND FIXING DETAILS FOR DHM70EX/DHM72EX

MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 92

NES 602
Issue 2
ITEM UNIT NSN THORN SECURITY

STOCK CODE NO .
A DHM7 4210-99-768-1563 517-001-123

B OR UK70R 4210-99-805-0926 517-001-097
B UK72R 4210-99-768-1562 517-001-098
A+B OR DHM70R 4210-99-736-4959 517-001-127
A+B DHM72R 4210-99-736-4960 517-001-129
C F712M 4210-99-768-1561 517-012-010
D DHMC 5905-99-763-1343 517-001-165
TABLE C1 STOCK CODES FOR DHM70R/DHM72R DECKHEAD MOUNTINGS
ITEM UNIT NSN THORN SECUIRTY

STOCK CODE NO .
A DHM7 4210-99-768-1563 517-001-123

B OR UK70EX 4210-99-769-0692 517-001-122
B UK72EX 517-001-125
A+B OR DHM70EX 4210-99-736-4961 517-001-149
A+B DHM72EX 6320-99-750-8495 517-001-150
C F712EX 4210-99-736-4962 516-012-011
D DHMC 5905-99-763-1343 517-001-165
TABLE C2 STOCK CODES FOR DHM70EX/DHM72EX DECKHEAD MOUNTINGS
Deckhead Mounting Tvpe DHM8
18 . This deckhead mounting is used with all the heat detectors

referred to in Annex B Paragraphs 79, 97 and 106 .
19 . The DHM8 consists of a DHM7, three 20mm cable glands and

locking nuts and a DHMA adaptor plate .
20 . The DHMC (see paragraph 17) can be fitted to a DHM8 and is

to be used with the older detectors referred to in Annex B
Paragraph 79 . It is not to be used with the H600 and H900
range of detectors (See Annex B Paragraph 98) as these
detectors have their own protective cage .
NOTE : As part of the BASEEFA certificate the H604 and H904,

which can be fitted in hazardous areas, must always be
fitted on a DHM8 . The THORN SECURITY Stock Code
numbers for the H604 and H904 includes for the detector
and the deckhead mounting in one package . In all other
cases the detectors and deckhead mountings are supplied
separately and have their own stock code numbers .

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG C14 DECKHEAD MOUNTING TYPE DHMB
N tE
REMOTE 1 t! 5 . .. /, iiieo rOS1IOYS
1} CATRR $ )CLES
IN IN .GUT
VJA
.l.
-IN _ OUT IN OUT
HEAT DETECTOR HEAT DETECTOR HEAT DETECTOR (111116&TAILS
H601 60° H600 /H 604 60° H602 60 •

H901°90° H900/H904 90° H902 90 •
FIG C15 CONNECTION AND FIXING DETAILS FOR DHM8 WHEN USED
WITH H600/H900 RANGE HEAT DETECTORS
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 94

NES 602
Issue 2
REP ITEM NSN THORN SECURITY

STOCK CODE NO
DHM 7 4210-99-768-1563 517-001-123
DHM A 4210-99-736-4956 517-001-132
A+B+C DHM 8 4210-99-736-4955 517-001-130
M4 X 25mm PAN HEAD
SCREWS 115-858-055
'0' RING 120-046-051
20mm GLAND 120-049-133
C 20mm LOCKNUTS 115-801-069
TABLE C3 STOCK CODES FOR DHM 8 DECKHEAD MOUNTINGS
Deckhead Mounting for M300 Series Detectors

21 . The DHM35 is used with the M300 series detectors .
22 . As all the detectors in the range fit into the same

detectors base (see Fig C18) the deckhead mounting and the
base are supplied separately and not as an assembly as is
the case with the DHM70 range .
23 . As the DHM35 is not supplied as an assembly it is not
supplied complete with cable glands and lock nuts . If
required these are to be called up separately . Two glands
and nuts are required for the standard deckhead mounting,
one set for the last mounting on a circuit and three sets
when an external indicator is to be fitted .

NES 602
Issue 2
CONTINUITY PLUG
FOR COMMISSIONING ONLY
IDENTIFICATION
COLOUR SPOT
0145 . 5 085 091 0 90
30 SLOTS
EQUI-SPACED
AROUND COVER
9 20
CLEARANCE
FOR REMOVAL
FIG C16 DHM35 DECKHEAD MOUNTING WITH M300 BASE
REF ITEM NSN THORN SECURITY

STOCK CODE NO
A M300 SERIES DETECTOR

HEAD-SEE ANNEX B
B SKIRT ] 517-025-001
C BASE ]
D DHM35
20mm CABLE GLAND 120-049-133
20mm LOCK NUT 115-801-069
TABLE C4 STOCK CODES FOR DHM35 WITH M300 BASE
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 96
NES 602
Issue 2
DETECTOR BASE WONG
ENO OF LWE
OEVKF
FIXING
CENTRES
FIG C17 CONNECTION AND FIXING DETAILS OF THE M300 DETECTOR BASE
Detector Base TvDe M300 and Accessories
FIG C18 DETECTOR BASE TYPE M300
NES 602
Issue 2
24 . The inner circular moulding of the skirt shows the four

detector types in symbolic form . An arrow head is printed
on one of the electrical contact pillars . When fitting the
skirt to the detector base, the chosen detector type symbol
is first placed against the arrow head . The skirt legs are
then inserted in the location points on the detector base .
The skirt is then turned clockwise until fully home . Once
the skirt is fully home in the chosen position the skirt may
only be removed using the Skirt Changer Head (See Fig C19
and Paragraph 26) .
25 . To provide continuity and some protection from dust before

the detector is fitted, a continuity plug is clippped into
position on the skirt (See Fig C20 and Paragraph 27) .
SLIDER GUIDE
SPIGOT
SPRING
WASHER
TUBE
FIG C19 M300 DETECTOR BASE SKIRT CHANGER HEAD
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 98

NES 602
Issue 2
26 . The skirt changer head is used to insert and remove the

skirt from the detector base . Extension poles are available
allowing the skirt to be removed from high sitings .
FIG C20 M300 DETECTOR BASE CONTINUITY PLUG
27 . The continuity plug is used during installation to

provide continuity before the detector is fitted . A
removal tab is provided which permits the plug to be
easily removed with a suitable tool prior to fitting
the detector .
28 . The DHMC protective cage cannot be used with M300

series detectors and bases .
Setting to Work
29 . This is dependent on the type of detector fitted and

procedures laid down in Annex B are to be followed .

NES 602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX C 100

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEX D
PROBE UNITS
Introduction
1 . Probe units containing detector heads are used to

detect smoke or the products of combustion by sampling
air in the exhaust ducts of air conditioning and
ventilation systems . The smoke or combustion products
may originate in the duct itself or may be drawn into
it from the protected space . The probe unit must be
installed downstream from the spaces being protected .
2 . If there are a number of inlets into the duct from a
number of different spaces it may be necessary to fit
more than one probe unit . If smoke or combustion
products enter the duct through the inlet furthest away
from the probe unit, clean air coming through the other
inlets will dilute them and detection will be delayed
or possibly not take place at all .
3 . There are four types of probe units described in this

Annex, two for high voltage systems (BR6521 (203)
refers) and two for low voltage systems .
4 . On high voltage systems only ion-chamber smoke

detectors are fitted in probe units but on low voltage
systems either ion-chamber or photo-electric smoke
detectors may be fitted .
5 . The air flow in the duct where the probe unit is to be

mounted must be in the range 2 .5 to 25 m/s (500 to 5000
ft/min) If the air flow is less than 2 .5 m/s there
will be insufficient flow to ensure a satisfactory
response . In this situation it is normal practice to
fit detector heads inside the duct .
6 . The ducting where the probe unit is to be mounted must

be reasonable flat to ensure a good seal between the
probe housing and the duct . The units are designed to
operate at the duct pressure which will probably not be
at atmospheric pressure . It is therefore necessary to
ensure the probe unit is properly sealed . Probe units
must not be sited close to any areas where the ducting
changes direction abruptly . In these regions the
airflow is likely to be turbulent .
MODNES/602/2/1990 101 ANNEX D

NES 602
Issue 2
7. For sampling tubes of 900 mm or longer a tube support

bracket must be fitted to the far side of the duct .
Description
8 . Each probe unit is supplied as a kit of parts less the
smoke detector head and detector base, which are
ordered separately to meet the system requirements .
9 . The probe unit incorporate a sampling tube, which has

one end sealed and a row of equally-spaced holes along
its length . This tube, with its holes facing into the
air stream, introduces air together with any combustion
products into the expansion chamber . Inside the
expansion chamber, the air is slowed down as it passes
the detector head to enable effective sampling to take
place .
10 . In the Type 6 probe unit (Figs D2 and D3) the air
returns to the duct through a second similar tube in
which the holes are arranged approximately at right-
angles to the air flow to produce an extracting effect .
The tubes are secured inside the expansion chamber by
means of a clamp and are supported at their closed ends
by a probe support fixed to the ducting . The detector
head is plugged into a detector base, and the cover of
the expansion chamber is sealed by a gasket . Gaskets
are also fitted between the duct and the detector
housing, and between the duct and probe support .
11 . In the other probe units the exhaust tube is

considerably shorter than the sampling tube and
terminates in an oblique, open end that is turned to
face downstream to obtain extraction .
Tvpe 5 Probe Unit
12 . The Type 5 probe unit is used on RFA vessels .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX D 102

NES 602
Issue 2
TubeSelection
13 . Type 5 probe unit sampling tubes are available ready

drilled in the following lengths :
Length THORN SECURITY SC No
450 mm 517-001-035
600 mm 517-001-036
750 mm 517-001-037
900 mm 517-001-038
1200 mm 517-001-039
1500 mm 517-001-040
14 . The exhaust tube of the Type 5 probe unit is supplied
ready for fitting .

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG Dl TYPE 5 PROBE UNIT-EXPLODED VIEW

THORN SECURITY S .C . NO 517 .002 .033
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX D 104

NES 602
Issue 2
Mountinct the Unit
15 . Mount the Type 5 probe unit as follows :
a . Using one of the sealing gaskets as a template, drill

the probe tube holes and the six equi-spaced fixing
holes in the selected position on the duct side wall .
b . Assemble the probe unit to Thorn Security drawing No :
517-001-033 together with its associated parts list,
connecting the detector base in circuit and inter-
connecting the neon indicator . Fit the detector base,
detector head and all gaskets .
c . Present probe tubes to the holes already drilled in the
duct wall and bolt the assembly to the clamp plates, in
position on the inner wall of the duct .
d . Loosen the grub screws which clamp the sampling tube

and rotate it until the holes are pointing towards the
airflow . Clamp the tube in position .
e . Repeat the process for the exhaust tube, but with the
angled surface of the tube facing downstream . Clamp in
position .
f. Fit a probe support (THORN SECURITY SC No : 517-001-034)
if necessary, on the opposite wall of the duct if the
sampling tube requires anchoring or exceeds 900 mm in
length .
Setting to Work
16 . Set the firing voltage of the Type 5 probe unit as follows :

a . Follow the detector setting-to-work procedures in Annex
B.
b . With detector head fitted inside the probe unit and all
covers tight, switch on the fans and check the detector
functionally by using a test fire (Annex B Para 14
refers), a smouldering wick or similar smoke source,
allowing smoke to enter the duct upstream of the probe
unit . Detection must occur within 3 minutes . If not,
unlock the sampling tube and re-orientate it, relocking
the tube in position . Repeat until satisfactory
detection is achieved .
WARNING A smoke generator of the metallic tetrachloride type
must not be used, as it forms harmful corrosive
products inside the detector head .

NES 602
Issue 2
Tvpe6Probe Unit
17 . The Type 6 probe unit is constructed to withstand greater

shock and vibration than the Type 5 and is used on R .N .
vessels .
18 . Type 6 probe units require that the sampling and exhaust

tubes be drilled as stated in AFA-MINERVA drawing No : 15108 .
19 . Mount the Type 6 probe unit as described in AFA-MINERVA

drawing No : 15600 (Sheets 1 and 2) .
20 . Set the firing voltage of the Type 6 probe unit by carrying

out the procedures laid down in AFA-MINERVA drawing No :
15600 Sheet 2 . A firing voltage of near 20V should be aimed
at for maximum response .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX D 106

NES 602
Issue 2
AIR
FLOW
COVER CUT AWAY TO SHOW

AIR CIRCULATION AROUND
DETECTOR HEAD
FIG D2 TYPE 6 PROBE UNIT-OPERATION

THORN SECURITY S .C . NO : 517 .001 .063
NSN 6359-99-923-8581

NES 602
Issue 2
PROBE SUPPORT
IAFA-MINERVA SC No 120.025.1531
GASKET
(AFA-MINERVA SC No 120-066 .011
(NSN05591200529)
GASKET
(AFA-MINENVACC No 5-013)
DETECTOR HOUSING
(AFA-MINERVA SC No 120-037-017)
DETECTOR BASE
(NSN VARIES ACCORDING TO BASE REQUIRED)
SECURING SCREWS
(4 BA 2 OFF)
(AFA-MINERVA SC No 115-012-0651
INSN055912005251
GASKET SAMPLING TUBE

IAFA-MINERVA SC No 120-066-012) IAFA-MINERVA SC No
INSN05591200527) 120 . 223. 0021
TUBE CLAMP
(AFA-MINERVA SC
No 120-015-027)
DETECTOR HEAD
(NOT SUPPLIED WITH ASSEMBLY)
SEALING RING
(AFA-MINERVA
SC No120-012-0801
(NSN0559/2005261
COVER PLATE
(AFA-MINERVA
SC No 120-036-362)
FIG D3 TYPE 6 PROBE UNIT - EXPLODED VIEW
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX D 108

NES 602
Issue 2
Duct Probe Unit Tvpe T700
General
21 . The T700 probe unit was designed for use with the F700
Series smoke detectors .
22 . The T700 uses the same sampling tube as the Type 5 probe
unit (see Paragraph 13 of this Annex) .
23 . The T700 has been superseded by the MP35 probe unit (see
later in this Annex) .
Description,
24 . The unit consists of a sealed polycarbonate box with a clear

lid through which the detector LED may be viewed . Within
the box is a mounting for a UK70R or UK72R base and two
heavy duty cable glands which clamp the inlet and outlet .
25 . The unit comes with a drilling template to assist in
drilling the duct .
26 . The unit is supplied without the detector, base, probe

tubes, and M20 cable entry glands .

NES 602
Issue 2
NOTE : Drilling Template provided .

AIR
'A' HOLES 43 dia (min) 4"- FLOW
45 dia (max)
'B' HOLES 4 dia
4 MOUNTING
HOLES (REF B)
PROBE TUBE
HOLES (REF A)
FIG D4 T700 - MOUNTING HOLES IN DUCT
Setting-to-Work
27 . With detector head fitted inside the probe unit and all
covers tight, switch on the fans and check the detector
functionally by using a test fire, a smouldering wick or
similar smoke source, allowing smoke to enter the duct
upstream of the probe unit . Detection must occur within'3
minutes . If not, unlock the sampling tube and re-orientate
it, relocking the tube in position . Repeat until
satisfactory detection is achieved .
WARNING : A smoke generator of the metallic tetrachloride type

must not be used, as it forms harmful corrosive
products inside the detector head .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX D 110

NES 602
Issue 2
DUCT WALL
INSIDE
DUCT WALL
FIG D5 PLAN AND SIDE VIEWS OF T700 DUCT PROBE UNIT,

UNIT SHOWN FITTED WITH DETECTOR, BASE AND PROBE TUBES

NES 602
Issue 2
Duct Probe Unit Tvpe MP35
General
28 . The MP35 probe unit is designed for use with the F700 and
the M300 ranges of smoke detectors .
29 . The MP35 uses the same sampling tube as the Type 5 probe
unit (see Paragraph 13 of this Annex) .
Description,
30 . The MP35 is a purpose designed unit consisting of two

injection mounting inserts for the detector base and split
bosses with clamps for the sampling tubes . The cover
moulding is shaped to form a snug fit over the detector and
is made of transparent polycarbonate, through which the
detector and detector LED and sampling tubes may be viewed .
31 . The MP35 probe unit is provided with a drilling template to

assist in drilling the duct for the position of the sampling
tubes and securing screws/bolts .
32 . The MP35 probe unit is supplied with tube support bracket

and two detector base/adaptor plate securing screws but
without the detector, detector base, probe tubes and UK7A
adaptor .
33 . The MP35 has two features to enhance performance giving

faster detection at lower air speeds :
a . The snug cover profile over the detector head guides

the sampled air through the detector .
b . A baffle fitted to the cover on the inlet side reduces

the air volume causing less dilution of any incoming
smoke prior to entering the detector head .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX D 112

NES 602
Issue 2
INLET TUBE
AIR INLET HOLES
ON REVERSE SIDE
FACING INTO AIR FLOU
END CAP J
FIG D6 DUCT PROBE UNIT TYPE MP35


NES 602
Issue 2
ChoiceofDetector Type
34 . In the THORN SECURITY M300 range of detectors the ion-

chamber and the optical (photo-electric) smoke detectors
have the same electrical characteristics and there is an
intrinsicly safe version of both types (Previously optical
detectors had a much higher quiescent current than the ion-
chamber detectors) . This now enables the Design Engineer to
select which type of detector to use without the previous
severe limitations, the high current consumption of the
optical detector imposed on the number that could be fitted
in the circuit . Optical detectors can now also be fitted in
ducting which is in or servicing a hazardous area .
35 . In many applications smoke or combustion products are likely
to have travelled some distance and to have aged before
reaching the detector and optical detectors have a better
detection capability of aged smoke .
36 . Ion-chamber detector sensitivity is affected by air movement
and changes in pressure such as will occur in a MP35 probe
unit .
37 . The performance of ion-chamber detectors may be adversely
affected by hot humid air causing condensation inside the
detector . This may exist in some duct environments .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX D 114

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEXE
CALLPOINTS
Introduction
1. Wired into a detection circuit, the break-glass callpoint

provides means for manually actuating the Fire Alarm . If
the glass is broken, the callpoint will raise the alarm and
initiate the same indications as detectors connected to the
same control unit .
2 . Breaking the glass releases a spring-loaded switch actuator,

thereby operating the switch and activating the alarm
circuit . The switch is wired in parallel with the detectors
in that circuit, using the cable specified, and is always
connected in the normally open configuration .
3 . Where the calipoints are required on RN ships, they_ are to be

strategically sited on the escape route from the protected
space at a height of 1 .4m from the deck .
TvDe WSB 117A Cailpoint

4 . The switch is contained in a cast iron case having a rust-
resistant finish and designed to withstand severe weather
conditions . The front cover is hinged at the bottom and
secured to the box by two Allen screws . A sealing gasket is
fitted between the front cover and the box to exclude
moisture . For test purposes, releasing the screws and
pulling the front cover forward will initiate the alarm .
Three clamps inside the front cover secure the glass .
Switch rating : 5A at 24V dc
5A at 240V ac 50Hz
Case : Cast iron
Finish : Red enamel
Cable entry : Tapped for 3/4 in conduit, top and
bottom .
Mounting : Surface only
Model Numbers :
NSN THORN SECURITY SC NO
Type WSB 117A
callpoint only 6350-99-549-0536 514-003-003
Type WSB G pack of ten
replacement glasses 6350-99-746-4920 515-001-004
5 . Use on High Voltage Systems .
MODNES/602/2/1990 115 ANNEX E

NES 602
Issue 2
G? E
FUE
GLASS
AI'~A-M/A/l~RVA
FIG El TYPE WSB 117A CALLPOINT

,m
J U U
FIG E2 TYPE WSB 117A FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX E 116

NES 602
Issue 2
TvpeZF121Callpoint
6. The callpoint comprises a switch housed in a box fitted with

a moulded plastic front cover . The cover is secured by a
single screw which can be unscrewed for test purposes,
allowing the switch to operate to the alarm (switch closed)
position, and for replacing the glass .
Switch rating : 5A at 24V dc
5A at 240V ac 60Hz
ox : Mild Steel
Finish : Front - red plastic moulding
Skirt - light grey plastic moulding
Mounting : Flush - as supplied but without skirt
Surface - as supplied
Model Numbers : THORN SECURITY SC NO

Type ZF 121 callpoint only 514-004-001
Type ZF 121 G pack of ten 515-001-003
replacement glasses
r FIRE A LARI4 --~)

0
EMI
FIG E3 TYPE ZF 121 CALLPOINT

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG E4 TYPE ZF 121 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Setting-to-Work
7 . Open the front cover to initiate the alarm . On completion
of the test, close and secure the cover .
CP200Series Calltoints
General
8 . There are a number of different callpoints in the CP200

series but they fall into two basic types, those that raise
a 'Fire Alert' and those that raise a 'Fire Alarm' . To
comply with S .O .L .A .S . (Safety of Life at Sea) regulations
Chapter-II - 2 Reg 13 controls unit on fire detection
systems now have a two stage alarm . When an alarm is raised
either by a detector or callpoint, only the alarm bells at
the control unit and repeater units will operate . If after
two minutes the alarm has not been accepted (this is
normally done by pressing the 'Bell Silence' switch on the
control unit) alarm throughout the crews' accommodation and
machinery spaces will operate . A 'Fire Alert' callpoint
will operate the two stage alarm but a 'Fire Alarm'
callpoint will override it and operate all the alarms
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX E 118

NES 602
Issue 2
immediately . 'Fire Alarm' callpoints are normally only

fitted in the Wheelhouse, Engine Control Room and Damage
Control Centre .
9 . Calipoints marked 'Fire' will signal the control unit to

give an alert response, whereas units marked 'Fire Alarm'
give an alarm response .
10 . All callpoints in the CP200 series have an integral red LED

response indicator .
11 . CP200 series callpoints can be tested without opening the

front cover . A key is inserted in a small opening in the
side of the calipoint which pushes the glass away from the
contact switch . This simulates the same condition as the
glass being broken . When the key is removed the glass
returns to its normal position (See Fig E5)
ARE
FIG E5 CP 200 SERIES CALLPOINT TEST FACILITY
12 . The glass is plastic coated to stop it fragmenting .
Switch Rating
13 . 100 mA at 30 V dc .
Material
14 . Main body . Modified Polyphenylene oxide .
Colour
15 . Red . Waterproof versions back box : Glass reinforced Nylon

6.

NES 602
Issue 2
Tvpe of Callpoints in the CP200 Series
16 . CP200 Standard unit for mounting in accommodation areas .

Alert response .
CP220 Waterproof intrinsically safe unit for use in
hazardous areas . A certified diode safety barrier
must be fitted in the wiring before it enters the
hazardous area . I .P . 66 rating . Alert response .
CP230 Waterproof unit . I . P . 66 rating . Alert response .
CP240 The same unit as the CP200 but supplied with a
transparent hinged cover for protection against
accidental operation . Alert response
CP250 The same unit as the CP200 but will give an Alarm
response .
CP260 The same unit as the CP230 but will give an Alarm
response .
Stock Codes
17 . Unit NSN THORN SECURITY SC
CP200 6350-99-774-8857 514-001-005

CP220 514-001-009
CP230 514-001-010
CP240 514-001-011
CP250 514-001-013
CP260 514-001-012
Spare glasses
pack of 5 6350-99-774-8858 515-001-015
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX E 120

NES 602
Issue 2
ALARM IND.
51 .5
L .E .D . (RED) ~_
FIRE
BREAK GLASS
PRESS HERE
THORN Security
TEST KEY
FIG E6 CALLPOINTS TYPE CP200, 240, 250
87
-51 P .C.D .
87 \n)
-20 CABLE
ENTRY
FIG E7 BACK BOX FOR CALLPOINTS TYPE CP200, 240, 250

NES 602
Issue 2
d I
FIG E8 CALLPOINTS TYPE CP 220, 230, 260
FIG E9 BACKBOX FOR CALLPOINTS TYPE CP220, 230, 260
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX E 122

NES 602
Issue 2
Flame Proof Calipoint Tvpe GVA/FA
18 . This is a BASEEFA certified flame-proof EX N 11 T6

callpoint .
19 . The GVA/FA can be fitted in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous

areas and do not require a diode safety barrier to be fitted
in the wiring .
20 . It is rated at I P 54 .
21 . It can be used to produce either an 'Alert' or an 'Alarm'

response when used with a THORN SECURITY T800 series control
unit . If an alert response is required a limiting resistor
of 560 ohms is fitted and for an alarm the limiting resistor
is 68 ohms .
22 . To test the GVA/FA callpoint undo the two screws on the

glass bezel, this allows the switch to operate . Once the
unit has been installed and commissioned the front cover
must not be removed unless the area in which it is mounted
is declared safe .
Switch Ratina
23 . 15 A at 415 ac
Material
24 . Glass fibre filled polyester dough moulded enclosure .
Colour
25 . Red .
Stock Code
26 . GVA/FA 514-001-002

NES 602
Issue 2
M6* mm~ALLEN
10
SCREWS GASKETTED COVER PROVIDING DEGREE
Of PROTECTION-IP5 t TO I EC 14L
20 m m 1APPEO
CABLE ENTRY
!/mm
_
m AL
0
COVER B00Y
N
W
L
v
cm
x
0
L:
FIG E10 FLAME-PROOF CALLPOINT TYPE GVA/FA

t VE f
IN OUT
YE
EO 4 •
LIMITING
RESISTOR
NOTE*- LIMITING RESISTOR TO BE FITTED :

WHEN USED WITH THORN SECURITY
T800 RANGE OF CONTROL UNITS
FIRE ALERT 560n .
FIRE ALARM 68 .a.
E .O .L_(IF FITTEO)4kln .
FIG Ell CONNECTION DETAILS OF FLAME-PROOF CALLPOINT TYPE GVA/FA
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX E 124

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEX F
END-OF-LINETEST UNIT TYPE T46 IS

Function
1. The end-of-line test unit provides manual means for line

continuity testing of the intrinsically safe high voltage
detection circuit to which it is connected . Provided the
unit is connected after the last detecter and/or callpoint
in the detection circuit at the furthest point from the
control unit, and the detection circuit is correctly wired,
it will provide a reliable indication that the circuit is
complete from the control unit to the end of the line .
A FA-MIN ERVA TEST
Ex BAS No Ex 75049 /B
FIG F1 END-OF-LINE TEST UNIT TYPE T46 IS
Description
2 . The unit comprises a box housing a pushbutton switch and a

neon indicator to THORN SECURITY SC No 590-001-003 .
3. a. Dimensions : Height 76mm, width 76mm, depth 54mm

b. Weight : 320gm
MODNES/602/2/1990 125 ANNEX F

NES 602
Issue 2
Mounting Procedure
4. a. Remove the cover assembly .

b . Drill the conduit/gland holes as required and remove
all swarf .
c . Bolt the box to the bulkhead using the two 5mm dia
holes in the back of the box . It should be located at
normal switch height in an accessible position .
d . Refit the cover assembly .
Fixing Centres
5 . The fixing holes are located as shown in Fig F2 .
73
14
r 2%
VV
73 44
T ti
44
TWO 5 DIA.
FIXING HOLES
FIG F2 TYPE T46 IS FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX F 126

NES 602
Issue 2
Connecting Cable
6. Cable, as used in the detection circuit (refer to Section

7), is to be connected as shown in Fig F3 .
TO LAST
DETECTOR
IN ZONE
FIG F3 TYPE T46 IS WIRING DIAGRAM
Setting-to-work
7 . Press the switch button and check that the neon indicator
illuminates .
MODNES/602/2/1990 127 ANNEX F

NES 602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX F 128

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEX G
ALARM SOUNDERS AND HIGH INTENSITY WARNING INDICATORS
Alarm Sounders
General
1 . When alarm sounders are connected to a control unit which

monitors the sounder circuit cables for short and open
circuit, such as THORN SECURITY T800 Series, they must be
suppressed and polarized . (See Fig G1)
+vE
-VE
FIG G1 SUPPRESSION AND POLARIZED DIODES FOR ALARM SOUNDERS
2 . On monitored circuits the cable must be looped in and out of

each device and a sounder end-of-line resistor fitted in the
last device on the circuit . Under no circumstances should
the circuits be spurred (Tee-ed) .
When the total starting current of all the alarm devices on

a circuit exceeds the control units sounder output current
rating a heavy duty relay must be used .
MODNES/602/2/1990 129 ANNEX G

NES 602
Issue 2
Types of Alarm Sounders
4. 6in (150mm) suppressed and polarized Standard bell used on

RFAs .
Current consumption : 50mA at 24V dc nominal

THORN SECURITY SC No : 576-500-009
NSN : 6350-99-541-3497
Colour : Red
Sound Output at 1M : 91dBA
5. 9in (230mm) suppressed and polarized Standard Bell .
Current consumption : 50mA at 24Vdc nominal

Colour : Red
Sound Ouput at lM : 95dBA
6 . Water-proof gasket back box for 6in and 9in bells .
Rating : IP44
FIG G2 61N AND 91N BELL WITH WATER-PROOF GASKET

BACK BOX EXPLODED VIEW
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX G 130

NES 602
Issue 2
7. 6in Standard bell (NSN6350-99-526-5194 with Dome NSN6350-99-

444-4679) used on warships .
8. Siren Type MS6

Current Consumption : Starting 1 .8A running 600mA at
24Vdc nominal .
Finish : Grey glass-filled nylon moulding
with red impeller .
Sound output at 3M : 87dBA
Frequency : 950Hz
79mm 01k
0 1
E
E
N
m
F IG G3 SIREN TYPE MS6

NES 602
Issue 2
FROM PREVIOUS
SOUNDER
OR CONTROL UNIT
FITTED
TO LAST
SOUNDER TO NEXT 01 . 02 AND E.O .L .
DEVICE SOUNDER TO BE FITTED ONLY WHEN
DEVICE SOUNDERS ARE MONITORED .
FIG G4 CONNECTION DETAILS FOR SIREN TYPE MS6
9. Banshee L F Electronic Sounder
THORN SECURITY SC
Standard I P 40 576-501-004
Weatherproof I P 66 576-501-007
Current consumption : 17mA
Finish : Banshee-red thermosplastic
Back box-balck thermosplastic
Sound output : Four settings all at 103dBA at 1M
1. Buzz : very fast sweep at approx . 120Hz
2. Fast : 800Hz to 950Hz sweeping at 9
times/sec
3. Slow : 800Hz to 950Hz sweeping at 3
times/sec
4. Continuous : 850Hz .
The Banshee is already polarized but a suppression diode is

required for monitored circuits .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX G 132

NES 602
Issue 2
SO
r
BACK
MOULDIf6
BANSHEE
BODY
WEATHERPROOF BACK
MOULDING
FIG G5 BANSHEE L F ELECTRONIC SOUNDER
FIG G6 BANSHEE CONNECTION AND FIXING DETAILS
10 . Intrinsically Safe Banshee L .F Electronic Sounder
THORN SECURITY SC 576-501-009
All the characteristics of the I .S . Banshee are the same as

for the weatherproof Banshee L .F . (see Paragraph 9 of this
Annex)
A certified diode safety barrier must be fitted in the

sounder wiring before it enters the hazardous area .

NES 602
Issue 2
Londesborough Hiah-Intensity Indicators

11 . High-intensity warning lamps, Londesborough .
Type 100 G .L . red lamps
Current consumption : 0 .75A
Type 100 GI - Red lamps

240V NSN 6620-99-531-5613
24V NSN 6620-99-531-5612
12 . Rotating Beacon
Power Consumption :Motor 23W at 24Vdc

Bulb 70W at 24Vdc
Total Current 4A
Flash Rate : 130/minute
Dome : Red Polycarbonate ultra violet stabilized .
It
P E
a
M
∎∎ e
FIG G7 ROTATING BEACON WITH FIXING DETAILS
13 . Xenon Flashing Beacon
THORN SECURITY SC NO : 401-003-040
Current consumption : 580mA at 24Vdc

Flash rate : 120/minute
Dome : Twin domes of Polycarbonate . Outer dome red
ultra violet stabilized .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX G 134

NES 602
Issue 2
FIG G8 XENON FLASHING BEACON WITH FIXING DETAILS
Setting-to-Work
14 . On raising an alarm :
Sounders : Check for audibility and distinctiveness of

tone when compared with other audible devices within
the area .
High Intensity Indicators : Check that the flasher can

be seen in any part of the protected space, either
directly or by reflection .

NES 602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX G 136

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEXH
VCS AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

Introduction
1 . This Annex describes a typical VCS system incorporating

the following units :
a. System Cabinet, containing :

Fire detection VCS Unit Type 255 (NSN6350-99-525-
8341)(TSLSC508-009-008)
Fire detection VCS Unit Type 256 (NSN6350-99-525-

8342)(TSLSC508-009-009)
Power supply VCS Unit Type 257 (NSN6350-99-525-

8343)(TSLSC559-006-002) (1 off for each fire
detection unit)
b . Ion-chamber smoke detector heads Type F36
(NSN4210-99-519-3462) in deckhead mountings Type
DHM2 (NSN6350-99-923-8579)
c . VCS Repeater panel assemblies 6-group (NSN6665-99-
560-8267)(TSLSC540-012-013) and 12-group(TSLSC540-
012-012)
2 . These systems are as referred to in
BR6521(101), BR6521(201) and BR6521(202) .
Function
3 . The function of the system is to call attention to an

outbreak of fire by detecting the presence of smoke or
invisible products of combustion in any area protected
by the system . When a fire is detected, an audible
alarm is sounded by a bell located in the vicinity of
the system cabinet . Simultaneously, the appropriate
detector group lamp indicates the location of the fire .
In addition, the alarm is repeated at the repeater
panels and at the Watchkeeper's alarm panel, if fitted .
MODNES/602/2/1990 137 ANNEX H

NES602
Issue 2
System Cabinet
4 . This consists of an aluminium alloy framework with side

and rear panels . The VCS units are contained in box
assemblies bolted into the cabinet, each unit being
located by a special spigot arrangement to ensure
correct positioning . Electrical connections between
the units and cabinet wiring are made via fixed plugs
and sockets .
5 . All incoming cabling enters through glands into a

terminal chamber at the base of the cabinet .
6 . The cabinet is mounted on shock absorbing mounts, four
at the top and four at the bottom .
Fire Detection VCS Units Tvpe 255 and Tvpe 256 (Fig Hi and
H2)
7 . The VCS units are similar in construction and

constitute plug-in modules that may be assembled into one or
more cabinets according to the number of detector groups
specified for the system .
8 . The fire detection VCS Units Type 255 and Type 256
provide means of receiving, indicating and generating
alarm signals arising from the triggering of the
remotely-positioned fire detection devices . The
maximum numbers of detectors that may be used with
these units are :
VCS Unit Type 255, a total of 48 detectors in 12 groups

of 4 .
VCS Unit Type 256, a total of 54 detectors in 6 groups

of 9 .
9 . When one of the detectors operates, the associated unit

provides a visual indication of the detector location
and generates alarm signals that operate a warning bell
and provide warnings to the Watchkeeper's VCS console
and to repeater panels .
10 . A facility exist for silencing the warning bell .
11 . Detectors can be individually electrically tested at

the detection unit .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX H 138

NES602
Issue 2
Note : In Hazardous Areas where detectors are
individually connected via an Interface Unit
Type T867 and the test facility is required,
the number of detectors will be as in Para
8 above . Where the test facility is not
required, the number of detectors connected
via each Interface Unit T867 to a Fire
Detection VCS Unit Type 255 or 256 can be up
to 10 per group .
0 0 0
G G B
0 O
NT ON BELL OFF G BELL OFF
G
LT NT
1o1o1o1o1oloI
-2t 0 TEST 42.6 1240 0
INCREASE
BIAS GROUP I
000
GROUP 2 GROUP3 GROUP 4 GROUP 5 GROUP 6
0
CONTROL MUST BE LEFT

AT MAXIMUM BIAS
2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 34 2 3 4
1 I
N~ N N N
I I I I
G G
J
GROUP 7
0
GROUP 8
J
GROUPS
/
GROUP 1O GROUP 11 GROUP 12
J
1 2 3 4 12 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
O O N N N N N
TEST RESET
ALARM
G G
C FIRE DETECTION UNIT - 12 C/IOUP O O
NOTE . ACCESS DOOR TO TEST PANEL IS 94OWN OPEN FOR CLARITY
FIG H1 FIRE DETECTION VCS UNIT TYPE 255

(NSN6350-99-525-8341)

NES602
Issue 2
O O O O
LT HT
to1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
-:c o TE4 + 42<O 0
INCREASE
BIAS ILL ON
(a
BELL OFF BELL OFF
CONTROL MUST BE LEFT

AT MAXIMUM BIAS
GROUP I GROUP 2 GROUP 3- GROUP6 GROUPS
C
GROUP 6
23
-G~7 14 2
O Q N
TEST RESET 9 8~
ALARM
O FOE DETECTION UNIT-6 GROUP O

NOTE . ACCESS DOOR TO TEST PANEL IS SHOWN CPENFOR CLARITY
FIG H2 FIRE DETECTION VCS UNIT TYPE 256

(NSN6350-99-525-8342)
Power Supply VCS Unit Tvpe 257 (Fiq H3)
12 . The power supply VCS Units Type 257 operate in

conjunction with fire detection units and provide the
power required to operate the detectors, fire bells and
warning lamps . In addition, the units incorporate a
gating circuit that reduces the likelihood of
generation of unwanted alarm signals, ie signals not
related to the detection of combustion products .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX H 140

NES602
Issue 2
0 0 0 0
® 0
SYS1Eld ON
0
SUPPLY ON
® ® 0 0
O SUPPLY FUSE
POWER SUPPLY
LT FUSE
FIG H3 POWER SUPPLY VCS UNIT TYPE 257

(NSN6350-99-525-8343)
12 Group Repeater Panel for VCS Unit Tvpe 255 (Fia H4) and 6
Group Repeater Panel for VCS Unit Tvpe 256 (Fia H5)
13 . The repeater panels repeat the visual indications of

their associated fire detection units . The 6-group
repeater panel is used with the fire detection unit VCS
Unit Type 256, and the 12-group is used with the VCS
Unit Type 255 . Power supply connection to the panel is
confirmed by the SUPPLY ON indicator .

NES602
Issue 2
1 SYSTEM ON I 1 BELL OFF 1 ISUPPLY ON)
FIG H4 12-GROUP REPEATER PANEL FOR VCS UNIT TYPE 225
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX H 142

NES602
Issue 2

I SYSTEM ON
I I BELL OFF
I
SUPPLY ON
FIG H5 6-GROUP REPEATER PANEL FOR VCS UNIT TYPE 256

NES602
Issue 2
14 . The 6 and 12-group repeater panels are similar in

construction, each comprising a surface mounting metal
box with a hinged front cover fastened with screws . On
the front cover are 6 (or 12) detection group red
indicator lamps with designation strips underneath for
marking the location of each group . Below these
indicators are three lamps designated :
SYSTEM ON - green lamp

BELL OFF - red lamp
SUPPLY ON - green lamp
The box contains a terminal unit, and two cable glands
are provided in the bottom for the entry of external
wiring .
Dimensions and Weiahts
15 . Dimensions (mm) Weight (kcr)
(Height x width x
depth)
VCS Unit Type 255 457 x 457 x 238 14 .51
VCS Unit Type 256 305 x 457 x 238 9 .98
VCS Unit Type 257 152 x 457 x 238 6 .35
Cabinet 1,646 x 549 x 305 79 .38
(less all units)
6 Group Repeater
Panel 385 x 415 x 155 8 .5
12 Group Repeater
Panel 385 x 415 x 155 9 .0
Mounting Reauirements
16 . The VCS units are designed for rack mounting in the

system cabinet, which is supported on shock absorbing
mounts (NSN5340-99-923-5718) .
17 . The repeater panel is secured with three bolts, using

the 14mm holes in the mounting lugs . Fixing centres
may be marked off on the bulkhead using the unit as a
template, or by reference to the dimensions shown in
Fig H6 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX H 144

NES602
Issue 2
346
L
3 HOLES 1A .0 DIA.
362
a
FIG H6 6-AND 12-GROUP REPEATER PANELS :

FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Detector Compatibility
18 . The VCS fire detection units are designed for use with
F36 ion-chamber smoke detector heads (NSN4210-99-519-
3462) .
Power Supply Requirements
19 . VCS Unit Tvpe 257
Input supply voltage and

frequency 115V +/- 10V 60Hz
Supply current : Normal 225 +/- 50mA

With full LT load 570 +/- 50mA

NES602
Issue 2
20 . Repeater Panel,
a. Supply voltage : 24 +3 .5 volts dc

-2 .5
b. Standby current : 250mA (approx .)
c. Fire alarm current : 1A (maximum)
Setting-to-Work
Basic System Checks
21 . Ensure that ALL VCS Units Types 255, 256 and 257 are
removed from the racks and that ALL detector heads are
removed from their bases . (Where fitted, Repeater
Panels and Watchkeeper's Alarm are to be disconnected) .
22 . Using a 500V Insulation Tester, check for a minimum

insulation resistance of 20 Megohms on the following :
a . Between each detector circuit line and earth
b . Between each test line earth
c. Between detector lines
23 . Ensure that pins 2 and 3 on each detector base are

electrically linked and that all other links are
removed .
24 . Ensure that each VCS rack plug and its appropriate VCS
unit socket line up, adjusting as necessary . Do not
fit the units at this time .
25 . Replace each VCS Unit Type 257 . Connect 115V ac

supply . Check that the SYSTEM ON and the SUPPLY ON
indicators are illuminated at to each unit .
26 . Remove 115V ac supply . Replace all VCS Units Types 255

and 256 and reconnect Repeater Panels and Watchkeeper's
Alarms where applicable .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX H 146

NES602
Issue 2
27 . Restore 115V ac supply . Check that the HT ON indicator
is illuminated at each VCS Unit Type 255 and 256 and
that, where applicable, repeater panel SYSTEM ON and
SUPPLY ON indicators are illuminated . At each VCS Unit
Type 255 and 256, check for the following voltages :
a . 216 to 264V dc between HTO and +240
b . 198 to 240V dc between HTO and +216
c . 21 .5 to 26 .5V dc between -24 and LTO
Detector Tests
28 . VCS Units Type 255 or 256 ; set the detector selector

switch to position 1 on group (zone) 1 . Operate and
hold operated, the TEST ALARM switch-button . Turn BIAS
potentiometer on test panel fully anticlockwise . A
reading of OV should be obtained between terminals HTO
and TEST . Turn BIAS potentiometer fully clockwise .
The voltage reading should now be 45-50V dc . Repeat
for each detector selector switch position in group
(zone) 1 . Return the selector switch to position N,
leaving the BIAS potentiometer in the fully clockwise
position . Repeat the above procedures for all groups
(zones) in the unit . The following tests apply only to
ion-chamber smoke detectors, other detector types must
be functionally tested as in para 36 .
29 . Remove 115V ac supply . Disconnect the bell wiring .

Restore 115V ac supply . Select a detector base in
group (zone) 1 and check that 198 to 240V dc is
measured at the line terminals . Insert a detector
head . At the fire dectection unit, with the detector
selector switch for that group (zone) set to the
correctly designated detector position, turn BIAS
potentiometer fully anticlockwise and hold the TEST
ALARM switch-button operated . With a voltmeter set to
0-50V dc range connected across HTO and TEST, turn the
BIAS potentiometer slowly clockwise to give an increase
in voltage of 1V/Second . An alarm should be raised
when the meter reads at the lower end of the voltage
sensitivity limits for the type of detector ; the
voltage measured falling immediately on alarm .

NES602
Issue 2
After a gating period of 5 seconds check that the
correct group (zone) indicator is illuminated and that
the detector position is correctly designated on the
panel below the group (zone) indicator . Release the
TEST ALARM switch-button, turn the BIAS potentiometer
fully anticlockwise and press the RESET switch-button
to return the system to normal .
30 . Repeat the above tests for each detector in the group

(zone) . On completion, set the detector selector
switch to position N and turn the BIAS potentiometer
fully clockwise .
31 . Repeat tests described in paragraphs 28 to 30 for all

groups (zones) in the unit .
32 . Carry out the following delay circuit timing tests :

a . Set any detector selector switch to a detector
position and momentarily press the TEST ALARM
switch-button . Check that the HT ON and SYSTEM ON
indicators extinguish for a period of four to six
seconds . Record the delay period .
b . Allow 35 seconds to elapse and press the TEST

ALARM switch again . Check and record that an
alarm is raised within two seconds .
c . Allow a further two minutes to elapse and repeat

tests in paragraph 32a and b . If the delay is
repeated the effective gating period is 35
seconds . If an alarm is raised within two
seconds, repeat, increasing successively the time
between a and b until the delay is repeated,
recording the new effective gating time between
tests in paragraphs 32a and b .
33 . Return all selector switches to position N and turn the

BIAS potentiometer fully clockwise .
34 . Remove 115V ac supply . Reconnect bell circuit .

Restore 115V ac supply .
35 . Repeat for all VCS Unit Types 255 and 256 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX H 148

NES602
Issue 2
36 . Carry out functional tests on each head, using the

appropriate test equipment for each detector . Check
that the bell(s) sound and that the indications occur
correctly at the fire detection unit and, where
applicable, the repeater panels .
37 . On testing the first detector head, operate the BELL-

OFF push-button . Check that the bell(s) have been
silenced and that the BELL-OFF indicator is illuminated
at the fire detection unit and, where applicable, the
repeater panel . Press the RESET switch-button to
return the system to normal .
38 . On testing subsequent detector heads, press the RESET

switch on raising an alarm (ignore BELL-OFF operation) .
39 . Repeat tests detailed in paragraphs 36 to 38 inclusive

for all detector heads in the ship's system .

NES602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX H 150

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEX I
AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTOR MARINE CONTROL UNIT TYPE T865
Function
1 . This single-zone unit is used to control and

redirect alarm signals emanating from a number of
callpoints Type ZF121 and WSB117A, ion-chamber
smoke detectors Type F35, heat detectors Type F80,
F81 and infra-red flame detectors Type F70 . The
fire location is ascertained by means of a pulsing
signal generated in the control unit upon the
operation of a detector . This signal, when
transmitted to an operated detector base
associated with a neon indicator, causes the
indicator to flash . At the same time, one of the
two lamps within the FIRE warning indicator at the
control unit flashes, the other remaining steadily
illuminated .
AM FA-NWNAV VA MARINE 865 MK 2
1
Fault Silence
Alarm
I
Fire Reset
System On Test
EMI
FIG I1 AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTOR MARINE CONTROL

UNIT TYPE T865
MODNES/602/2/1990 151 ANNEX I

NES602
Issue 2
Description
2. The unit comprises a sheet steel cabinet with a hinged

front cover . Three visual indicators at the left-hand
side of the front cover have coloured lenses as
follows :
Fault : amber
Fire : red
System on : clear
Three pushbutton switches at the right-hand side are

protected by rubber bellows and labelled :
Silence Alarm
Reset
Test
3 . All electronic components are mounted on a plug-in

p .e .c . and on a sub-chassis hinged to the rear of the
front cover for easy access . Electrical connections to
the detectors, sounders, auxiliary equipment and power
supply are made via a suitably labelled terminal block
fixed to the inside rear face of the cabinet . The unit
is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No 508-009-002 .
NSN6320-99-539-2989 .
Dimensions and Weictht
4. a. Dimensions : Height 180mm, width 320mm, depth

115mm
b. Weight : 6 .0kg
Input Voltage and Current
5. a. Input Voltage 24V dc nominal (20 to 32V dc)
b. Input Current 170+/- 30mA Standby

450 +/- 50mA Alarm (excluding
sounders)
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 1 152

NES602
Issue 2
Output Voltage and Maximum Loading
6 . a . Output Voltage : 210V dc nominal (250V dc

nominal with end of line
resistor disconnected)
b. Sounder Load : 300mA maximum

c. Fault buzzer load : 100mA maximum
Note : If the total sounder load current requirement

exceeds 300mA, an Alarm Relay Unit Type
T12M/HD should be used, which is capable of
switching resistive loads of 25A at 25V dc
and 5A at 220V dc . The current consumption
of the relay coil is
approximately 100mA .
Environmental Limits
7. Temperature : -20°C to + 70 °C
Relative Humidity : Up to 95%
Associated EctuiDment
8 . The unit is functionally compatible with the following :
Ion-chamber smoke detector

Type F35 516-002-007/8/9
Heat detector Type F80BY 516-008-019
Heat detector Type F81 516-008-022
Infra-red flame detector Type F70 516-005-001/2/3
Callpoint Type WSB117A 514-003-003
Callpoint Type ZF121 514-004-001
Detector Base - extended flashing 517-001-006
Deckhead Mounting Type DHM1 517-001-057
Alarm Relay Unit Type T12M/HD 541-001-006
Surge Suppression Unit Type T61 508-001-023
Marine Power Unit Type T605 559-006-001
A maximum of five infra-red detectors Type F70 can be
connected to the unit .

NES602
Issue 2
Mounting Procedure
9. a. Open the front cover (2 screws) and remove the

terminal block (2 off 4BA nuts and washers) .
b . Drill the top or bottom of the cabinet to suit the

cable gland positions . Remove any swarf .
c . Using the back of the cabinet as a template (with

the hinge on the right-hand side) mark and drill
holes for three 6 .5mm dia bolts . Bolt the unit in
position .
d . Refit the terminal block and front cover .
e . Connect all external wiring to the terminal block .
Fixing Centres
10 . Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig 12 .
308
114 178
32
3 -10- 4 116
3 HOLES 6 . 5 DIA
FIG 12 TYPE T865 FIXING HOLE' LOCATIONS
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 1 154

NES602
Issue 2
Setting-to-Rork
11 . a. Check that the SYSTEM ON lamp is illuminated .

b . Manually operate the TEST switch ; check that :
(1) the sounders operate .
(2) both FIRE lamps within the indicator housing

are illuminated, one flashing and the other
steady .
(3) the SYSTEM ON indicator flashes .

c . With the TEST switch on, operate the SILENCE ALARM
switch ; check that :
(1) the sounders are silenced .
(2) both FIRE lamps become steady .
(3) the SYSTEM ON indicator continues to flash .

d . Upon releasing both switches the system should
revert to the standby condition .
e. Operate and hold the RESET switch button
depressed ; after a short delay check that :
(1) the FAULT indicator is illuminated .

(2) the fault buzzer sounds
f . With the RESET switch on, operate the SILENCE
ALARM switch and check that the fault buzzer is
silenced .
g. Carry out the setting-to-work procedures as in

Annex B on all the detectors in the system .
Repeat for each detector in the system, silencing
alarms and resetting at each detector operation .
h . Actuate each callpoint by opening the front cover,
silencing alarms and resetting after each
callpoint operation .

NES602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 1 156

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEX J
MARINE POWER UNIT TYPE T605 Mk 2
Function
1 . This unit provides the main 24V dc supply required by

the AFA-MINERVA Automatic Fire Detection Marine Control
Units Type T865 and T864 . Power for the operation of
the unit is derived from the ship's main ac electrical
system . The unit is also connected to the ship's
emergency 24V dc supply to ensure continuous operation
of the control unit in the event of failure of the main
ac supply . Failure of either the main or the emergency
supply is indicated by illumination of the appropriate
visual indicator on the power unit, and relay contacts
in the power unit activate a warning buzzer in the
control unit .
1 THOR 4 $ECUR1Y MARINE T605 wc2
A C SUPPLY
FAXIM
A.C. SUPPLY
FIG J1 MARINE POWER UNIT TYPE T605 MK 2
Description
2 . The unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No 559-006-

001 NSN 6320-99-539-2988 and comprises a sheet steel
cabinet with a hinged front cover displaying two visual
indicators and an information label . All electrical
and electronic components, other than the visual
MODNES/602/2/1990 157 ANNEX J

NES602
Issue 2
indicators and terminal block, are assembled on a

removable pivoting chassis behind the front cover,
providing access to all components . Five fuses,
appropriately identified, are mounted on the front face
of the chassis .
3 . The two lamp housings, with amber lenses and each
containing two 28V filament lamps, are identified
respectively ac Supply Failure and dc Supply Failure .
Electrical connections to the ship's ac and dc power
supplies and to the control unit are made from a
terminal block inside the back of the cabinet .
4. a. Dimensions ; Height 180mm, width 320mm, depth 115mm
b. Weight : 5 .02kg
Input Voltage and Current
5. a. Input voltage : 100-120V ac 50-60Hz

or 200-240V ac 50-60Hz
b. Input current : Control unit on standby 40MA
at 240V ac
Control unit in alarm (less

sounders)
100mA at 240V ac
c. Ship's emergency 24V dc supply used on failure of
the ac supply .
Output Voltage and Current
6. a. Output voltage : 24V dc

b . Output current : 1A maximum
7. Temperature : -20 ° C to +70°C
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX J 158

NES602
Issue 2
Mountinq Procedure
8. The unit is designed for surface mounting using bolts,

through fixing holes in the back of the cabinet . To
gain access to the fixing holes,
a. open the front cover
b. remove the terminal block plate (two 4BA nuts and

washers)
C. remove the front cover from its hinges and store

until required .
9 . Drill the top or bottom of the cabinet to suit the type

of cable entry, ie cable glands . Remove any swarf .
10 . Using the cabinet as a template, with the hinges on the

right, drill the fixing bolt locations and secure the
unit in position . Refit the terminal block plate and
front cover .
Fixing Centres
11 . The fixing holes are located as shown in Fig J2
308
A
114 178
32
V
3 HOLES 6 . 5 OtA
FIG J2 TYPE T605 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
MODNES/602/2/1990 159 ANNEX J

NES602
Issue 2
Connecting-up
12 . Ensure that the transformer input tapping is correctly

connected to suit the ship's supply voltage . Connect
all external wiring to the terminal block in accordance
with the system wiring diagram .
Setting-to-Work
13 . a . Check that no Fault indicators are illuminated .

Connect a dc voltmeter across terminals 9(+ve) and
10(-ve) and check that 24V dc exists across these
terminals .
b . Disconnect the ac supply and check that the ac

Supply Failure indicator is illuminated, that the
buzzer in the control unit sounds and that 24V dc
is measured across terminals 9 and 10 . Reconnect
the ac supply and disconnect the voltmeter .
c . Disconnect the emergency dc supply and check that

the dc Supply Failure indicator is illuminated and
the buzzer in the control unit sounds . Reconnect
the emergency dc supply .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX J 160

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEXK
AUTOMATICCONTROLANDINDICATINGUNITTYPET864MK2
Function
1. The type T864 control unit is for use in automatic fire

detection systems installed in Division 1 and 2
hazardous areas . This single-zone control unit is
sited outside the hazardous area and is used to
control and redirect alarm signals emanating from an
intrinsically safe fire detection circuit within the
hazardous area incorporating approved ion-chamber smoke
detectors Type F35 and heat detectors Type F80 and Type
F81 .
2 . Power is derived from a battery or other regulated

source delivering a nominal 24V dc (20-31V) supply .
The circuit, which includes a dc/dc converter, supplies
220V dc to energize the detector circuit and 12V dc for
the control functions .
C 1O1 1o1 1w1
o1HOrIv SECURITY
m 0
PUSH SILENCE ALARM
PUSH TEST & RESET
SYSETM
FIRE T864 MK2

CONTROL UNIT
0 0
FIG K1 AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND INDICATING UNIT TYPE T864 MK2
MODNES/602/2/1990 161 ANNEX K

NES602
Issue 2
Description
3 . The unit, which has been allocated THORN SECURITY SC No

508-009-006, incorporates two sub-assemblies, namely
the front panel assembly and the box assembly .
a. Front panel assembly : this accommodates the user

controls and visual indicators, which are arranged
one above the other at the left-hand side of the
front panel as follows :
SILENCE ALARM push-button switch

TEST & RESET push-button switch
SYSTEM ON neon indicator behind the
neutral-coloured transparent
window
FIRE twin lamp indicator with a red

translucent window
On the back of the front panel is a printed

circuit board assembly, incorporating all the
control and alarm circuit components, protected by
a steel cover plate .
b. Box assembly : this includes the terminal blocks,

encapsulated zener barrier, flexible cableform,
terminal connection card, intrinsically safe label
and a clip board for spare lamps, all mounted
inside the back of the box . Cable entry is via
cable glands which, on installation, may be at the
top or bottom of the unit .
4. a. Dimensions overall : Height 290mm, width 320mm,

depth 110mm
b. Weight : 7 .5kg
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX K 162

NES602
Issue 2
Power Supply and Electrical Data

5. a. Supply input voltage : 24V dc nominal ( 20-
31V)
b. Detector line voltage : 220V dc nominal
(200-235V)
c. Control function voltage : 12V dc stabilized
d. Supply current (with 24V 100mA standby
dc input) : condition
320mA alarm
condition ( but with
sounders off)
e. Converter frequency : 1000Hz
6. Temperature : -15 ° C to +85°C

Mountinct Procedure
7. The unit is to be mounted outside the hazardous area,
in the position indicated on the appropriate
installation drawing, by means of four 12mm bolts
through holes in vertical straps welded to the back of
the box . The box can be mounted with the cable entries
at the top or bottom . The front panel can be removed
by unscrewing four 2BA screws and is then to be
supported so that its weight is not carried by the
cableform .
Fixina Centres
8. Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig K2 .

NES602
Issue 2
318
2 6.
. 5j
26 .5
N
C
N t0
N
I
I
265
4 HOLES 12 .7 DIA
r I
FIG K2 TYPE T864 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Associated EauiDment THORN SECURITY SC NO

9. Ion-chamber smoke detector Type F35 516-002-007/8/9
Heat detector Type F81BZ 516-008-022
Detector base - non-flashing 517-001-061
Deckhead mounting Type DHM3 517-001-059
Alarm relay unit Type T12M/HD 541-001-006
Surge suppression unit Type T61 508-001-023
Power supply unit Type T605 559-006-001
A maximum of 30 detector heads used with special non-
flashing bases can be connected to the unit, comprising
ion-chamber smoke detectors Type F35 and heat detectors
Type F80 or F81 provided no more than 20 Type F80 or
F81 detectors are used .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX K 164

NES602
Issue 2
Setting-to-Work
WARNING :, HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION TESTS MUST ONLY BE MADE ON

DETECTOR CABLES IF THE HAZARDOUS AREA IS IN A SAFE
CONDITION . IF THE AREA IS CONSTANTLY SUBJECT TO
HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS, THE ONLY TEST THAT CAN BE
MADE CONSISTS OF FUNCTIONALLY OPERATING DETECTORS
AND CHECKING FOR LINE LEAKAGE AT THE CONTROL UNIT .
10 . a. Check that in the quiescent condition the flashing
SYSTEM ON indicator only is illuminated and all
sounders are off .
b. Activate a detector to simulate a Fire condition
(see Annex B) . Check that the FIRE indicator
illuminates and the sounders operate .
C. Check that operation of the SILENCE ALARM
pushbutton silences the sounders and the FIRE
indicator remains illuminated .
d. With the FIRE condition still effective at the
detector, momentarily operate the TEST & RESET
pushbutton . Check that the sounders reoperate and
the FIRE indicator remains illuminated . Operate
the SILENCE ALARM pushbutton to silence the
sounders .
e. When the actuated detector is no longer subject to
Fire conditions, check that momentary operation of
the TEST & RESET pushbutton extinguishes the FIRE
indicator and restores the control unit to the
standby condition .
f. Repeat operations in paragraph lob, c, and e for
all detectors in the system .
g. Simulate a Fire condition during the standby

condition by continuously pressing the TEST &
RESET pushbutton . Check that the FIRE indicator
illuminates and the sounders operate while the
pushbutton is depressed and that releasing the
pushbutton restores the standby condition .

NES602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX K 166

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEX L
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T870 MR 2
Marine Control & Indicating Unit Tvpe T870 Mk2
Function
1. The Type T870 control unit (Fig L1) provides power

supplies, logic functions, visual indications and user
controls for an automatic fire detection system of up
to 10 zones . Used in conjunction with repeater unit
Type T270 Mk3 (para 13) and fire and fault indicators
at remote stations, the control unit provides the
facilities required for ships with manned or unmanned
machinery spaces, such as RFA's .
Note : Two further types of control unit are also

available, they are :
a. Type T871 (console version of Type T870) .
b . Type T872 (same facilities as Type T870 but with

control capability for 30 zones, contained in two
similar sized cabinets) .
2. In order that fire can be located as well as detected,
each detection zone is linked independently to the unit
and each zone circuit has its own indicator . Provision
is made for testing and isolating individual zone
circuits, and all detector circuits are monitored for
open circuit and line leakage faults . All vital relays
are either monitored for a fault condition,*or 'fail
safe' to give visual or audible indication .
Description
3 . The control unit is housed in a sheet steel cabinet and

is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No 508-009-003 NSN
6320-99-539-9504 and incorporates a hinged front door,
consisting of two transparent panels in a metal frame,
secured by a knurled knob . Opening the door gives
ready access to the unit controls, which are mounted as
follows :
MODNES/602/2/1990 167 ANNEX L

NES602
Issue 2
a. On the left of the upper panel are eight twin-lamp

visual indicators, labelled :
FIRE (Red)
MAINS FAILURE (Amber)
BATTERY FAILURE (Amber)
H .T . FAULT (Amber)
ZONE FAULT (Amber)
TEST (Amber)
ZONE ISOLATED (Blue)
SYSTEM ON (Green)
,EEl
ZONE ZONE ZONE

1 3 5
tWIE I LAZE MIFF
'EST
r
It 14
~_ .
ZONE ZONE ZG €
2 4 6
ISMAIE MOTE 6Ol81E
FIG L1 MARINE CONTROL AND INDICATING UNIT TYPE T870 MK2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX L 168

NES602
Issue 2
b. To the right of the indicators are six push-button

switches labelled :
SILENCE ALARMS
RESET
LINE LEAK ]
LINE BREAK ] Mechanical latching
TEST ALARM/AUTO RESET ] switches
DIM DISPLAY
c . The lower panel comprises five sections, each

containing the indicators and controls for two
zones, ie ten zones in all . The indicators are of
the twin lamp encapsulated type . The controls for
each zone consist of two pushbutton switches, the
upper for zone TEST and the lower for zone
ISOLATE . The zone ISOLATE SWITCH is self-
latching .
4. Internal plug-in sub-assemblies are mounted in a
chassis which can be swung forward on its hinges to
disclose the cableforms and terminal blocks inside the
back of the cabinet .
5. a. Dimensions overall : height 472mm, width 577mm,

depth 331mm
b. Weight : 49kg
6. a. Mains supply : 100, 110, 120, 200, 220 or 240V ac

within +10% and -20%, 50 or 60Hz .
b. Secondary supply : 24V dc nominal (22 to 32V)

NES602
Issue 2
c. Input currents, both supplies on :
Standby condition *Alarm condition

Mains supply :
100V ac 415mA 780mA
110V ac 380mA 720mA
120V ac 340mA 650mA
200V ac 190mA 380mA
220V ac 170mA 340mA
240V ac 160mA 320mA
Secondary supply :
24V dc 8OmA 80mA

24V dc secondary
supply after mains
failure 780mA 2 .2A
* Alarm condition including repeater unit but

excluding sounders .
7. Temperature : -20 °C to +700C

Mounting Procedure
8. The unit is designed for bulkhead mounting and is to be

secured with four 13mm dia . bolts through the fixing
holes in the back of the cabinet . Proceed as follows :
a . Place the complete unit against the bulkhead in

the selected position and support it securely,
using trestles or a table and timber, or some
other suitable robust support .
b . Release the front door by unscrewing the knurled

knob on the right .
c . Unscrew the eight hexagonal-headed screws to

release the chassis assembly .
d . Manually supporting the chassis assembly, swing it

out on its hinges . The unit will become unstable
when the chassis is in the open position therefore
the chassis must also be strongly supported from
underneath .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX L 170

NES602
Issue 2
e. The four fixing holes will now be accessible and

the cabinet can be bolted in .
Fixing Centres
9. Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig L2 .
440
78
I 4
320 472
78
1 557 1
FIG L2 TYPE T870 MK2 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Cable Entry
10 . Cable is to be brought out as convenient through the

removable plates (440 x 80mm) at the top and bottom of
the cabinet . The plates are to be drilled to take the
appropriate glands .
Associated Eauinment
11 . Ion-chamber smoke detector Type F35 516-002-007/8/9
Infra-red flame detector Type F70 516-005-001/2/3
Heat detector Type F81BZ 516-008-022
Callpoint Type ZF121 514-004-001
Callpoint Type WSB117A 514-003-003
Detector base - flashing 517-001-005
Detector base - extended flashing 517-001-006
Deckhead mounting Type DHM1 517-001-057

NES602
Issue 2
Alarm relay unit Type T12M/HD 541-001-006

Multi-zone marine repeater unit
Type T270 Mk3 540-012-011
NOTE : Not more than 5 detectors Type F70 may be

used per zone .
Settinc-to-'Work
12 . a . System On Indicator : Check that the SYSTEM ON
indicator is illuminated .
NOTE : If repeater units are included in the system,
refer to paragraph 20 .
b. Fire Alarms . Silence Alarms and Reset Functions :
(1) Latch-in the TEST ALARM/AUTO RESET switch .

Check that the common TEST indicator
illuminates and the buzzer sounds .
(2) Press and release the Zone 1 TEST non-

latching switch . Check that the common FIRE
indicator illuminates, all sounders operate
and the appropriate zone indicator flashes .
(3) Press the SILENCE ALARMS switch . Check that
all sounders other than the external buzzers
are silenced and the zone indicator becomes
constantly illuminated .
NOTE : In the event of a Fault warning, the Fault
buzzer cannot be silenced except by
correcting the cause of the fault .
(4) Press the RESET switch . Check that the FIRE
and zone indicator are extinguished and the
external buzzers are silenced .
(5) Repeat procedures in paragraph 12b(2) to (4)

for all zones .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX L 172

NES602
Issue 2
NOTE : When in conditions described in paragaph

12b(l) to (3), the auto-reset circuit
functions will return the system to
standby if the individual zone test
exceeds 20 seconds . If this happens, by
again pressing and releasing the
appropriate zone TEST switch, the test
for that zone can be continued .
(6) On completion, half-depress the LINE BREAK

switch in order to bring out the TEST
ALARM/AUTO RESET switch . The common TEST
indicator will be extinguished and the
external buzzers will cease, the unit
returning to the standby condition .
WARNING : It is imperative that the TEST

ALARM/AUTO RESET switch be released in
order to prevent automatic resetting in
the event of a detector bringing up a
FIRE condition .
c. Zone Fault Functions
(1) Latch in the LINE BREAK switch . Check

that the common TEST indicator
illuminates and the external buzzers
sound .
(2) Press and release the zone TEST switches

one after the other . Check that each
operation causes the common ZONE FAULT
indicator to illuminate .
(3) Half depress the LINE LEAK switch to

bring out the LINE BREAK switch . Check
that the common TEST indicator is
extinguished and the external buzzers
are silenced .
(4) Latch in the LINE LEAK switch . Check

that the common TEST indicator
illuminates and the external buzzers
sound .
(5) Press and release the zone TEST switches

one after the other . Check that each
operation causes the common ZONE FAULT
indicator to illuminate .

NES602
Issue 2
(6) On completion, bring out the LINE LEAK

switch by half depressing the LINE BREAK
switch to return to the standby
condition .
NOTE : If repeater units are included in the

system, establish that each indication
is repeated while the tests are being
made . On conclusion, follow the TEST
ALARM procedure for a selected zone and
check the functions of the SILENCE
ALARMS control at the repeater unit .
d. Mains Failure Indicator
Arrange for the lines from the ship's ac main

supply to be disconnected . Check that the
indicator illuminates AND RECONNECT THE SUPPLY .
e. Battery Failure Indicator
Arrange for the lines from the ship's dc supply to

be disconnected . Check that the indicator
illuminates AND RECONNECT THE SUPPLY .
f. Detector and callpoint testinq is to be carried

out at the conclusion of installation . Activate a
detector to simulate a fire condition (see Annex
B) . Actuate a callpoint by removing the front
cover, silencing alarms and resetting at each
detector/callpoint actuation . Repeat for each
detector and callpoint in the system . Where
appropriate, carry out the fire tests laid down in
Section 12 .
Multi-Zone Marine Repeater Unit Tvpe T270 Mk3
Function
13 . The unit operates in conjunction with the marine

control and indicating unit, Type T870 Mk2 or Type T871
Mk2 to repeat the TEST, ZONE ISOLATED and individual
ZONE indications at the control unit . A common FAULT
indicator repeats any of the following control unit
fault conditions :
Mains Failure
Battery Failure
HT Fault
Zone Fault
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX L 174

NES602
Issue 2
The following user controls are also provided,

labelled :
SILENCE ALARMS
TEST LAMPS/BUZZER
FIG L3 MULTI-ZONE MARINE REPEATER UNIT

TYPE T270 MK3
Description
14 . The Repeater unit T270 Mk3 is supplied to THORN

SECURITY SC NO 540-012-010, NSN 6680-99-545-4073 .
Mounted in the hinged front cover of the steel box are
thirteen twin-lamp visual indicators (10 red, 2 amber,
1 blue), two push-button switches and a buzzer .
Mounted on the inside rear face of the box is a printed
circuit board assembly incorporating a number of
semiconductor diodes, voltage reducing resistors and
two terminal blocks .
15 . Dimensions : Height 190mm, width 320mm, depth

89mm
b. Weight : 3 .83kg
16 . The unit requires an independent 24V dc (18-32V)

supply, or may be connected directly to the appropriate
terminals of a Type T870 or T871 control unit .

NES602
Issue 2
17 . Temperature : -20°C to +70 0C

Mounting Procedure
18 . a. Remove the front cover and printed circuit board

assembly .
b . Drill cable gland or conduit entry holes in the

box before fixing the unit in position . Clean out
all swarf .
c . Use the box as a template for drilling the

necessary holes and fix the box to the bulkhead
with three 6 .5mm dia bolts .
d . Refit the printed circuit board assembly and

cover .
Fixing Centres
19 . Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig L4 .
308
114 178
32
me-38- -11G 116-~
3 HOLES G •5 DIA
FIG L4 TYPE T270 MK3 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX L 176

NES602
Issue 2
Settinct-to-Work
20 . The correct functioning of this unit will be verified

during the tests detailed in para 12 by checking that
each indication at the control unit is repeated . Press
the TEST LAMPS/BUZZER switch and check that all
indicators are illuminated and that the buzzer sounds .
On concluding the tests, follow the TEST ALARM
procedure for a selected zone at the control unit and
check the function of the SILENCE ALARMS control at the
repeater unit .

NES602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX L 178

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEXM
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T868

Function
1 . The function of the automatic fire detection single-

zone Control Unit Type T868 is to provide visual and
audible warning of fire by detecting the presence of
smoke, invisible products of combustions and/or heat in
Division 1 and 2 hazardous areas protected by the
system . A Type T273 Repeater Unit (paragraph 4) may be
used to repeat all system Fire and Fault indications,
and a Type T430 Relay Flasher Unit (para 18) may be
added to the system to operate strategically sited
common flashing alarm indicators and common alarm
klaxons . The system in coastal minehunters is
described in BR6521(108) .
Description
2 . The component parts of this system have a very low

magnetic signature, making the system suitable for use
in minehunters, etc . The basic system can incorporate
up to three Type T868 IS Control Units connected to one
Type T273 Repeater Unit, all sited in non-hazardous
areas . Collectively these units contain all the
functions necessary to monitor, for alarm or line-
leakage fault, three separate intrinsically safe
detection zone circuits . Each detection circuit can
contain a combination of up to nine ion-chamber smoke
detectors Type F36 or heat detectors Type F80 and F81
within the hazardous area . Unit descriptions are
detailed in the following paragraphs .
Type T868 IS Control Unit (Fist M1)

3. The control unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No
508-009-001 NSN 6350-99-252-7274 in the form of an
aluminium box with three lugs for bulkhead mounting .
All the user controls and indicators are on the front
cover, which is hinged and secured with captive screws .
A hinged door in the front cover gives access to a test
panel which enables internal voltages to be checked by
means of a test meter . Inside the unit is a printed
circuit board assembly that incorporates all the
electronic circuits and relays .
MODNES/602/2/1990 179 ANNEX M

NES602
Issue 2
Two terminal blocks are provided for cables that enter

through cable glands in the top and bottom of the box .
The user controls comprise :
A SILENCE ALARM push-button switch

A RESET push-button switch
A TEST push-button switch
A rotary DETECTOR SELECTOR switch .
The indicators, all twin-lamp, comprise :
A clear HT ON indicator
A red FIRE indicator
An amber DETECTOR CIRCUIT FAULT indicator
An amber ALARM SILENCED/TEST indicator
M/IVEi2Lf IVlAI4//VE T868 1S. CONTROL UNIT .
0 0 *C) Q*
0 NATO 5110" N. 0
AM OETELTON D'kRROLIMQRTE TKO
WNUFAC'Mi£RS CODE
0 SERIAL N.. YEAR
FIRE
2
9 3
8 L
7 5 SILENCE
tEl
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
6
DETECTOR SELECTOR
ALARM
FAULT SWITCH
F0]
ALARM SILENCED
TE57
0 0
RESET
0 0
ACCESS TO TEST
F-1 PANEL 0 TEST
H T.ON
0 0
0
0 Q 0 0
I EMI
U U
FIG M1 IS CONTROL UNIT TYPE T868
(NSN 6350-99-252-7274)
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX M 180

NES602
Issue 2
Tvpe T273 Repeater Unit (Fiq M2)
4 . This unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No 540-012-

001 and is of similar construction to the control unit
and displays the following twin-lamp indicators :
Three red FIRE indicators

An amber SILENCE LOCAL ALARM push-button switch
An amber FAULT indicator
To one side of the FIRE indicators is an engraved plate

showing the locations of the respective control units .
I IVIINERYAAW44A W„MA-2 T273 RCPEAr wwr
.rfewe
FIRE ore
FIRE
L RIM
FAULT
S1LENICE
LOCAL
ALARM
EMI
FIG M2 REPEATER UNIT TYPE T273
Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions Weight
(Ht x Width x Depth)
5. a. Type T868 IS Control
Unit 376 x 379 x 143mm 5 .4kg
b. Type T273 Repeater
Unit 276 x 279 x 100mm 3 .6kg

NES602
Issue 2
Power Supu1v Requirements
6. a. Type T868 IS Control

Unit Input voltage : 24V dc
nominal (18 to 32V)
Input current :
Standby condition 175mA
Alarm condition 450mA
b. Type T273 Repeater

Unit Input voltage :24V dc
nominal (18 to 32V)
Input current :
Standby condition 2 .5mA
Alarm condition 275mA
7 . Temperature : 0 °C to +55°C
Mounting Procedure
8 . Each unit is to be secured with three bolts, using

12 .7mm holes in the mounting lugs . Fixing holes may be
marked-off using the unit as a template or by reference
to the dimensions given in paragraph 9 .
Fixing Centres
9 . The locations of fixing holes are shown in Figs M3 and

M4 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX M 182

NES602
Issue 2
379
190
n
r 0
v
n
262 60
FIG M3 TYPE T868 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Setting-to-work
Preliminaries
10 . Before commencing, check that the detector cables are

disconnected from the control unit terminal blocks, all
detector heads are removed from their bases and the 24V
dc supply is switched off . The Detector Selector
switches on the control units should be set to position
N . Carry out the tests in the order stated .

NES602
Issue 2
279
140
3 HOLES 12 . 7 01A
276 303
198
Equipment Required
11 . a . Detector, Tester, THORN SECURITY SC No 517-001-001

(NSN4240-99-543-1303) (for F35/F36 Detector Heads)
b . Voltmeter, sensitivity not less than 20kn/V ie

Multimeter 9X (CT498) NSN6625-99-949-1999
c. 500V insulation tester (subject to WARNING)
d. Stopwatch NSN6645-99-521-6482
e. Resistor 1 .5MJL+/-5% 0 .5W .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX M 184

NES602
Issue 2
WARNING : HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION TESTS MUST ONLY BE

MADE ON DETECTOR CABLES IF THE HAZARDOUS AREA
IS IN A SAFE CONDITION AND THE CABLES ARE
DISCONNECTED FROM ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT . IF
THE AREA IS CONSTANTLY SUBJECT TO HAZARDOUS
CONDITIONS, THE ONLY TEST THAT CAN BE MADE
CONSISTS OF FUNCTIONALLY OPERATING DETECTORS
AND CHECKING FOR LINE LEAKAGE AT THE CONTROL
UNIT .
Insulation Tests
12 . Carry out insulation tests on the detector cables into
the hazardous area . Where high voltage tests can be
performed between conductors and between conductors and
screen, the results must all be INFINITY . On
completing the tests, connect the cables to the control
unit terminals as indicated on the terminal labels and
connect the detector cable screen to the earthing stud .
Ensure that all hazardous area wiring is separated from
the safe area wiring by at least 6mm .
Voltacte Tests
13 . a. Connect and switch on the 24V dc supply to the

system . Check the HT ON indicator on each of the
control units is illuminated .
b. Open the test panel door on each control unit and,

with the multimeter set to a suitable dc range,
measure voltages as follows :
(1) 220V test points : 215 +/- 10V
(2) 15V test points : 15 + 1V, -1 .5V
Detection Circuit Auto-test Facility
14 . a. At a control unit, set the Detector Selector

Switch to Position 1 .
b. Continuously press the TEST push-button and check
that, when the selected detector triggers, the
FIRE indicator illuminates .
C. Release the TEST push-button .
d. Press the Reset push-button and check that the

FIRE indicator is extinguished .

NES602
Issue 2
e . Repeat operations a to d with the Detector

Selector Switch set in turn to Positions 2 to 9 .
f . On completion, return the Detector Selector Switch
to Position N .
g . Repeat the detection circuit tests at each

remaining control unit of the system .
Lire Alarm Tests
15 . a. Using the detector tester, carry out a simulated

fire test on an F36 detector head . After
resetting, if the hazardous area is SAFE, using a
heat source such as a hair dryer, carry out a
simulated fire test on the F80 or F81 detector
head (see Annex B) . If the area is in a hazardous
condition, carry out the trigger threshold test on
the F80 and F81 detector head, as in paragraph 16 .
Where appropriate, carry out the fire tests laid
down in Section 12 .
b . Check that the FIRE indicator illuminates on the

appropriate control unit and that the correct FIRE
indicator illuminates on the repeater unit .
c. If fitted, check that the relay flasher unit

causes the sounders to operate and the visual
indicators to pulse, or be steadily illuminated,
as required (see paragraph 18) .
Triaaer Threshold Tests
16 . At a selected control unit, connect a multimeter, set

to a suitable dc voltage range, to the TRIG terminals
on the test panel . Proceed as follows :
a. Set the Detector Selected Switch to Position 1 .
b. Continuously press the TEST push-button . The

multimeter must indicate a voltage steadily
increasing at between 0 .5V/s and 1 .OV/s .
c . Observing the FIRE indicator, record the voltage

at the instant the indicator illuminates . Check
that the voltage is within the following limits :
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX M 186

NES602
Issue 2
(1) Type F36 detectors, 16 to 33V
(2) Type F80, F81 detectors, 50 to 100V

d . Release the TEST push-button and operate the RESET
push-button . Check that the control unit returns
to the standby condition, ie the FIRE indicator is
extinguished .
e . Repeat operations a to d, setting the Detector
Selector Switch to each of the detector positions
in turn . Any detector head that fails to meet
these requirements must be replaced with a
serviceable item .
f . On completing the tests, return the Detector
Selector Switch to Position N and disconnect the
multimeter .
g. Repeat paragraph 1 6a . t o f . for each remaining
control unit .
Fault Indication Tests
17 . a . Connect a 1 .5M1t0 .5W resistor across the positive

and negative line terminals at the last detector
base in each detector circuit in turn . Check that
with the resistor connected, the DETECTOR CIRCUIT
FAULT indicator at each associated control unit
illuminates and the FAULT indicator at the
repeater unit illuminates .
b. Check that when the resistor is removed, the
control unit and the repeater unit return to the
standby condition .
c. Having completed the tests, secure the test panel

doors on the control units . The system is now
operational .
Type T430 Relav Flasher Unit (Fiq M5)
Function
18 . When activated by an alarm signal from a Type T868

control unit, the relay flasher unit provides two
separate pulsing outputs to operate common flashing
alarm indicators and four separate continuous outputs
to energize common alarm klaxons .

NES602
Issue 2
Description
19 . The unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No 540-013-

001 and has no user controls or indicators . Mounted
behind the front cover is a PEC assembly and a relay
assembly . Inside the box is a terminal block for cable
connections . Cables can be brought in through glands
in the top and bottom of the box, which is designed for
surface mounting .
I MI/VERS/IR /V*ARI/VE T430 RELAY FLASHER UNIT
HATO STOOL K..

IETAT FLASrM W T
T430
E
w .NU t~F76CC
SERIAL N . . TEAR
e e
O e
o e
EMI
!1 1
FIG M5 RELAY FLASHER UNIT TYPE T430
20 . a. Dimensions : Height 276mm, width 279mm, depth

100 mm
b. Weight : 5 .4kg
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX M 188

NES602
Issue 2
21 . a . Input voltage 24V dc nominal ( 18 to 32V)

b . Input current Standby condition : zero
Alarm conditions : 75mA
22 . Temperature : O°C to +55°C

Mounting Procedures
23 . The unit is to be secured with three bolts, using

12 .7mm holes in the mounting lugs . Fixing holes may be
marked off using the unit as a template or by reference
to the dimensions given in paragraph 24 .
Fixing Centres
24 . Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig M6 .
Setting-to-Work
25 . The correct functioning of the unit is verified during

the system setting-to-work tests (see para 10) .

NES602
Issue 2
279
140
3 HOLES 12 . 7 O(A
27G 303
198
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX M 190

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEX N

Function
1. The control and indicating unit Type T880 (Fig N1)

provides logic functions, visual indications and user
controls for an automatic fire detection system of
between 9 and 32 zones . For systems with up to four
zones use a T882 control unit (see Annex Q) and for
systems of between five and eight zones use a T881
control unit (see Annex 0) .
2 . The T880 is used in conjunction with a Power Unit Type
T680 (Annex P) and repeater unit Type T280 (paras 25 to
41 of this Annex) .
3. Two additional units are available ; the first unit will
increase the capacity of the system to 64 zones and the
addition of the second unit will further increase it to
96 zones . The units are identical to the T880 except
that the zone numbering and the numerical indicator run
from 33 to 64 and 65 to 96 respectively .
Description
4 . The control and indicating unit is supplied to THORN

SECURITY SC No . 508-013-012 . NSN 6320-99-778-4582 .
5 . All the visual indicators and user controls are mounted
on the front cover of the unit .
a. Visual Indicators
POWER ON (Green) - 2 bulbs

FIRE (Red) - 3 bulbs
FIRE ALARM (White) - 2 bulbs .
See Fire Alarms in 'b' User Controls .

FIRE ALERT (white) - 2 bulbs . See Fire Alert in
'b' User Controls .
MODNES/602/2/1990 191 ANNEX N

NES602
Issue 2
FAULT (amber) - 2 bulbs . This indicator will

illuminate if there is a fault in the control
unit ; if there is a short or open circuit on the
zone wiring or if a detector is removed . If the
fault is in a zone's wiring or a detector has been
removed, the relevant zone indicators will also be
illuminated .
ZONE INDICATOR FAULT (amber) - 2 bulbs . The zone

indicators have one bulb each which are monitored .
This indicator will give a warning of a bulb
failure .
MAINS FAULT (amber) - 2 bulbs . This indicator

will give a warning in the event of the failure of
the a .c . supply to the T680 power supply unit .
STANDBY SUPPLY FAULT (amber) - 2 bulbs . This

indicatorwill give a warning in the event of the
failure of the 24Vdc supply to the T680 power
supply unit .
SOUNDING WIRING FAULT (amber) - 2 bulbs . This
indicator will give a warning in the event of a
short or open circuit in either of the sounder
circuits .
ZONE TEST (white) - 2 bulbs . This indicator will

be illuminated if one or more zones are put into
the test mode .
ZONE ISOLATED (white) - 2 bulbs . This indicator

will be illuminated if one or more zones are
isolated .
ZONE 32 off (white) - 1 bulb monitored . When the

control unit receives a fire signal from a
detector or call-point the main FIRE indicator
will illuminate and the relevant ZONE indicator(s)
will flash and the sounders will operate . When
the alarm is accepted, by operating the silence
alarm switch the zone indicator will become
steady . Any new alarm will cause the relevant
zone indicator to flash and the sounders to
operate . This new alarm is accepted as above .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 192

NES602
Issue 2
NOTE : All fault conditions will cause the

internal buzzer to operate ; this
can be silenced by operating the
Silence Alarms switch . A fire
condition will also operate the
internal buzzer but in this
condition it cannot be silenced
until the control unit is reset and
returns to the normal stand-by
condition .
b. UserControls
With the exception of the key-operated enable

switch all User Control is by means of the
membrane-operated press switches . In the normal
state all User Controls (except for LAMP DIM and
for RESET when used in conjunction with LAMP DIM)
are inhibited, although TEST and ISOLATE switches
may be used to determine the Zone . Test/Zone
Isolate status, i .e . the switches are usable for
interrogation purposes only . User controls are
available only when the ENABLE key is activated .
Cover nm
fixing 1 FIRE I lRU ALERT
SPARE 1
LIMPS
screws
FAULT I MASS
sum
I FAULT iii
"am =W
U0 L=
MW "M "M Owl
MW =W mn ow ow
® r4.:;li ® 49 Owl
W r
Numerical
indicator
co
Enable
switch
FIG Ni CONTROL AND INDICATING UNIT TYPE T880

NES602
Issue 2
The push switches are positioned in two groups,

Operator Controls and Zone Controls respectively .
FIRE ALARM - This switch will allow the operator

to activate the alarm sounders which will ring
continuously until the 'SILENCE ALARMS' switch is
operated . The FIRE ALARM indicator will also
light . No resetting is required .
FIRE ALERT - This switch will allow the operator

to activate the alarm sounders which will pulse at
the rate of 1 second ON/1 second OFF until the
'SILENCE ALARMS' switch is operated . THE FIRE
ALERT indicator will also light . No resetting is
required .
SILENCE ALARMS - Permit alarm sounders, warning

sounders, and any other equipment which may be
connected to the sounder outputs, to be cancelled
(switched off) . Any further alarm, alert and
warning conditions will restart the appropriate
sounder(s), and possibly the other connected
equipment, until the 'SILENCE ALARMS' switch is
again operated . In a fire condition, the internal
buzzer cannot be silenced until the controller
itself has been reset . However the buzzer can be
silenced in a fault condition .
RESET - Returns the controller to the normal state

after an alarm . The alarm sounders must be
silenced by use of the 'SILENCE ALARMS' switch
before the controller can be reset . Alarm
indications will clear when the 'RESET' switch is
operated but, if an alarm condition still exists
or is again detected, the indicator for the
affected zone(s) will relight, (see ZONE in 'a') .
LAMP DIM - This switch will cause the light

intensity of all indicators to be reduced to a
pre-determined level . Full intensity may be
restored by the use of the 'RESET' switch .
LAMP TEST - This switch permits all indicators to

light allowing a visual check for defective
(unlit) lamps .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 194

NES602
Issue 2
SELECT - This switch is used to pre-select a zone

which may subsequently be put into a 'TEST' or
'ISOLATE' mode, or be cancelled from such a mode .
The switch must be depressed until the number of
the required zone is shown on the numerical
indicator . It is advisable to stop the scan just
prior to reaching the zone number and then to
operate the switch momentarily several times until
the correct digit appears .
TEST - This switch will put into the 'TEST' mode

the zone pre-selected by use of the 'SELECT'
switch - provided that the 'CONTROL ENABLE' switch
is operated (i .e . turned to the 'ON' position) .
If the 'CONTROL ENABLE' switch has, however, not
been operated, operation of the 'TEST' switch
causes the indicator of any zone which is
currently in the 'TEST' mode to light . Any number
of zones may be put into the 'TEST' mode at the
same time .
This facility enables an operator to test a zone

of detectors without fear of an alarm being given
external to the controller . That is, there will
be no sounder operation and connected auxiliaries,
e .g . vent plants, will not be affected .
When a detection device is operated on a zone

under test, the controller will latch an alarm
condition for 4 seconds, indicate that alarm
condition by lighting the ZONE indicator
continuously, and will then reset after a further
12 seconds . This process will repeat itself for
as long as the detection device is operated . An
indicator on the detection device, or any other
associated indicator, will light when the device
operates .
ISOLATE - This switch will put into the 'ISOLATE'

mode that zone pre-selected by use of the 'SELECT'
switch - provided that the 'CONTROL ENABLE'
switch is operated (i .e . turned to the 'ON'
position) . If the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch has,
however, not been operated, operation of the
'ISOLATE' switch causes the indicator of any zone
which is currently in the 'Isolated' mode to
light . Any number of zones may be put into the
'ISOLATED' mode at the same time . This facility
enables an operator to isolate a zone as a
temporary measure when, for instance, an activity
which might cause false alarms is being carried
out in an area of that zone . Where this is a

NES602
Issue 2
regular occurrence, an MTD 24 Detector Isolate
Timer should preferably be used . A further
example of the use of the 'ZONE ISOLATE' facility
is in the segregation of a problem zone pending or
during repair .
The 'ZONE ISOLATE' facility electronically
inhibits controller T880 such that Fire and Fault
Signals from a zone are ignored . The facility
does not disconnect the zone wiring .
CANCEL - This switch will cancel a Test or an
Isolate condition which may currently exist on
that zone pre- selected by the zone 'SELECT'
switch . The 'CONTROL ENABLE' switch must first be
operated .
NOTE : If a zone which is in an alarm
condition is removed from 'Test' or
'Isolate', a full alarm will be
raised .
VariableLegend
6 . Any or all of the legend strips on the T880 are
removable and can be replaced by legend strips labelled
to meet the requirements of each individual system (See
Fig N2) . Sets of blank legend strips are available to
THORN SECURITY SC No . 509-013-121 . The most common use
for this facility is to replace the Zone strips with
strips replacing the word ZONE with an abbreviated
description of the area covered by each zone . It is
recommended that the zone number is always included
albeit in much smaller print .
NOTE : It is recommended that special legend

strips be suitably labelled, before
dispatch to the vessel, by using one of
the many instant lettering systems
available, e .g . Letraset,
Mechanorma, etc . If absolutely
necessary, and in extreme situations,
the strips may be labelled using Indian
ink, black spirit - or water-based
marker, or even black pencil .
Legend strips so marked however are to
be replaced at the earliest opportunity .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 196

NES602
Issue 2
RED WHITE WHITE
AMBER AMBER WHITE
'POWER ON'
STRIP IS GREEN
SWITCH LEGENG STRIP IS WHITE,

WITH A CUT-OUT FOR THE
ZONE NUMERIC INDICATOR .
FIG N2 VARIABLE LEGEND STRIPS

NES602
Issue 2
SUecif ication
General
7. The control unit type T880 is a self-monitoring fire

detection unit designed for use in marine environments
and to withstand shock and vibration and provides :-
a monitoring for 32 fire-protection zones
b an isolation and testing facility for each of

those 32 zones,
c 2 monitored sounder circuits,
d a multiplexed output drive for associated units

such as Repeater Units Type T280, or Zone
Output/Mimic Drive PEC (see para 10),
e fire and general fault volt-free changeover

contacts .
Terminal Fields
8. The standard T880 is fitted with two terminal fields .
a. Terminal Field 'A' contains the terminals for

zones 1 to 8, sounder circuits outputs (see para
9), multiplexed repeater outputs, fire and general
fault volt-free changeover outputs and power
inputs .
b. Terminal Field 'E' contains the terminals for

zones 9 to 32 . Terminal field 'E' also has four
programmable output relays which, with the
optional zone output/mimic drive PEC, gives a
programmable zonal output facility (see para 10 d
& e) .
Sounder Outputs
9 . There are two separate sounder outputs, each rated 2 .5A

at 30V dc and separately fused at 5A . The sounders
have a common supply input and are normally powered
from the controller 28V dc input .
Alternatively, the sounders can be powered by an

external dc power supply, if the load is too great for
the control unit power supply .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 198

NES602
Issue 2
Operation of sounder output B2 is delayed (after output

B1 has operated) . The delay (between eight seconds and
three minutes) is set by adjusting potentiometer R139
on Terminal Field A .
The delay may be overridden by operating either the

'FIRE ALARM' switch or the 'FIRE ALERT' switch . By
connecting G2, the controller can be set so that the
alarm calipoint will also override the delay .
In addition, the outputs can be set either to pulse one

second ON - one second OFF (alert condition)_ or be
continuous (alarm condition) . These are affected by :-
a . SINGLE STAGE/TWO STAGE ALARM switch fitted to

the electronic assembly .
b . The value of resistor fitted to a normally
open contact callpoint :-
Alert Callpoint - 560 ohm e .g . CP200

and CP230
Alarm Callpoint - 68 ohm e .g . CP250
and CP260
The effects are :-
Type of Single Stage Two Stage

Contact G2 Not Connected G2 Not
Connected
unless stated unless stated
B1 B2 B1 B2
Detector Inst . Del . Inst . Del .
Cont . Cont . Puls . Puls .
Alert Callpoint Inst . Del . Inst . Del .
Cont . Cont . Puls . Puls .
Alarm Callpoint Inst . Del . Inst . Del .
(G2 not connected) Cont . Cont . Cont . Cont .
Alarm Callpoint Inst . Inst . Inst . Inst .
(G2 connected) Cont . Cont . Cont . Cont .
Fire Alert Inst . Inst . Inst . Inst .
Button Puls . Puls . Puls . Puls .
Fire Alarm Inst . Inst . Inst . Inst .
Button Cont . Cont . Cont . Cont .

NES602
Issue 2
Inst . = Instantaneous Operation

Del . = Delayed Operation
Cont . = Continuous Operation
Puls . = Pulsing Operation
The pulse mode of the sounders may be changed through a

very wide range of configurations by the use of a
Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module .
NOTE : An output which has been put into the pulsing

mode will become continuous if a device which
causes a continuous output is operated .
However, the converse does not- occur .
An output which has been initiated with a delay will

operate immediately if a device causing an instant
output is activated .
An output is latched in the alarm state until the

'SILENCE ALARMS' switch is operated .
Devices connected to the sounder outputs must be

suppressed and polarized . The THORN SECURITY range of
standard bells and banshee sounders (but not sirens)
are supplied suppressed and polarized .
Other Inputs and Outputs
10 . a. Alarm Output
The 'Fire Alarm' output is a single-pole voltage-

free relay output having changeover contact rated
5A at 30v dc resistive .
The alarm output latches until the 'SILENCE

ALARMS' and 'RESET' switches are operated in
sequence .
b. Fault Output
The 'Common Fault' output is a single-pole

voltage-free relay output having normally
energized changeover contacts rated 5A at 30v d .c .
resistive .
This output does not latch . The relay will re-

energize when the fault is removed .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 200

NES602
Issue 2
c. Multiplexed Data Input/Outputs
These inputs/outputs may be used to drive up to

four remote units which may be Repeaters (Type
T280) and/or Zone Output/Mimic Driver PECs subject
to the total length of cable used not exceeding
1000m .
NOTE : The above specifies the drive capability of

the logic outputs . The power supply requirements
of the various remote units must be considered
separately .
The R6 input is a fault input for the remote

equipment detailed above . It may also be used as
a fault input from other equipments . When the
input is open-circuit or at OV, the common FAULT
indicator lights, the fault relay de-energizes and
the fault buzzer sounds .
d. Auxiliary Relay Outputs
Provided with Terminal Field Type E, which is only

fitted to the controller having the deep housing,
are four Auxiliary Output Relays . Each Relay has
a 24V coil and a single-pole voltage-free
changeover contact set rated 1A at 30V dc
resistive .
e. Zonal Outputs
Individual Zonal Outputs are not available

directly from controller type T880 . However the
Zonal Output/Mimic Driver PEC, which is available
as an optional extra, provides individual open-
collector outputs for each zone and for all common
fire and fault signals . This PEC may be used :-
(1) fitted into the Controller T880

(2) fitted remotely in a box with the appropriate
relays
(3) fitted into a mimic
There are facilities on terminal Field 'E' for

programming the 32 open-collector zone outputs
into the four Auxiliary Relay Outputs .

NES602
Issue 2
f. Supply Fault Inputs
The Mains Fault input (PSF) and Standby Supply

Fault input (F) are normally energized by the
Power Supply Unit type T680 . Both inputs are in
the 'no fault' condition when an open-circuit or
OV input is present and light the fault indicators
when an input of 12-30V dc is present . The
minimum input impedance is 50K ohm .
g. Lamp Dim Control Output
The Lamp Dim Control Output (LC) is normally used

to switch the lamp supply (LB) when it is derived
from the Power Supply Unit type T680 . Output LC
is a 5V dc logic output through a 1k ohm series
resistor . The output is 5V nominal for normal
lamp brilliance and OV nominal for lamp dim . A
Lamp Dim Module may be used to provide a variable
output to the lamps for dimming, if required .
h. Hazardous Areas
The zone inputs may also be used with an

intrinsically safe system such as System 601 for
the protection of hazardous areas having zone
classifications 1 & 2 . Not all the facilities of
Controller T880 will be available, some cable
requirements may be different and some resistor
values may require changing (see Annex S) .
FaultMonitoring and Indication
11 . Faults are shown by the lighting of fault indicators as

detailed in para 5 and by the operation of the internal
buzzer . Fault conditions are not latched . While a
fault condition exists, the buzzer may be silenced by
operating the 'SILENCE ALARMS' switch . The buzzer will
re-sound should a further fault condition occur .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 202

NES602
Issue 2
Other Facilities
12 . a . Switch Interface Unit
A number of facilities can be provided by use of

the Switch Interface Unit . These include the
disabling of any front panel switch and its
replacement by a remote input .
b. Earth Leakage Module for Power Supply Unit T680
A module which monitors earth leakage may

optionally be fitted into the Power Supply Unit
type T680 .
c. Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module
A Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module has been

designed to permit the operation of sounders in a
pre-defined pulsing configuration . A large range
of pulsing configurations is possible, any one of
which may easily be determined by the fitting or
removal of one or more links .
The module may either be fitted inside the T880

series of controllers or be separately mounted .
The former is preferred . (See Annex S)
d. Lamp Dim Module
Designed primarily for use where a T680 Power

Supply Unit is not fitted, the Lamp Dim Module
provides a facility whereby the brightness of the
lamps in the 'dimmed' condition may be varied by a
preset potentiometer . The potentiometer may be
fitted either at the module itself or at another
suitable location on or near the controller .
The module may either be fitted inside the T880

series of controllers or be separately mounted .
The former is preferred . (See Annex S)

NES602
Issue 2
Detector Capability
13 . Number of Detectors
The number of detectors and/or callpoints that may be

connected to any one zone is limited by these factors :-
a Good fire engineering practice .

b The quiescent current drawn by the detectors
and callpoints .
Only the second is directly concerned with the actual

operation of the controller . The total permitted
quiescent current for all the devices on any one zone
is 3mA maximum .
Nominal Quiescent Currents for typical standard devices
are as follows :-
a 100u A
- F712M Ion-Chamber Smoke Detector

- M300 Series Detectors
- D801 Heat Detectors
b 150u A
- D802 Heat Detectors

- S610 Flame Detectors
c Zero
- Normally open contact thermal switch

devices such as the H600, and H900 series
- Normally open contact manual alarm
callpoints such as CP200, CP230 and CP260
Power Supply Requirement
14 . There are two separate power supply inputs to the T880

Controller from the T680 Power Supply Unit .
a . LA This is the main supply to the

electronic assembly and, through
it, the detection devices .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 204

NES602
Issue 2
b. LB This is the supply to the internal

lamps in the T880 . This supply
would be switched by the Lamp Dim
output (LC) to provide one voltage
to the lamps for full brilliance
and another, lower, voltage for
Lamp Dim .
NOTE : Supplies must have a common OV
All supplies may float relative to earth .
Control Unit Power Unit Supply Ratings

15 a. Voltage LA LB
Nominal Voltage 26V

Nominal Voltage
(Normal Brilliance) 26V
Nominal Voltage
(Lamps Dimmed) 15V
Maximum Voltage 32V 32V
(See note 1)
Minimum Voltage 23V 6V
(See note 2)
Maximum Ripple Content 100mV pk

NOTE : 1. Lamp life reduced .
2. Lamp intensity reduced .
CAUTION : The T680 does not regulate or smooth the
emergency supply . This supply must
therefore lie within the limits as given
above for 'LA' .

NES602
Issue 2
b. Current Consumption - Ouiescent
NOTE : All currents are measured at a nominal

voltage of 26V from LA and LB .
LA LB
(1) Main Electronics
Normal Condition
(Enable Key Off) 95mA 8OmA
Mains Failure
(Enable Key Off) 85mA 140mA
Lamp Test
(Enable Key On) 215mA 2120mA
(2) Per Detection Zone Used
End of Line Device 4mA
Maximum current drawn by

detectors (see Para 13) 3mA
Total maximum current/zone 7mA
(3) Total Maximum Ouiescent

Current
(Main Electronics plus
32 zones)
Normal 320mA 8OmA
Mains Failure 310mA 195mA
Lamp Test 440mA 2120mA
c. Current Consumption - Alarm
NOTE : All currents are measured at a normal

voltage of 26V from LA and LB .
LA LB
(1) Main Electronics 135mA 190mA
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 206

NES602
Issue 2
(2) PerZone
Alarm Callpoint Operated 50mA 38mA
Alert Cailpoint or Detector

Operated 25mA 38mA
Zone not in alarm 7mA
(3) Total Alarm Current
Main Electronics + 8 zones

in alert + 24 zones not in
alarm 500mA 500mA
Main Electronics + 32 zones
in alert 935mA 1400mA
d. Sounder Supply (BS) and Auxiliary Supplies (+28V)
The current requirements for these supplies will

be dictated by the current drawn by the devices
connected to these outputs . (See para 9)
Mechanical Specification
16 a. Overall Dimensions
(1) Housing without 'H' frame
Height 385mm
Width 398mm
Depth 171mm
(2) 'H' Frame
Height 339mm
Width : 458mm
Thickness 13mm
NOTE : The T880 is normally supplied with the
'H' frame fitted .
b. Weights
Complete unit without frame 11 .5k g

Complete unit with frame 15 kg

NES602
Issue 2
Enviromental Characteristics
17 . Operating Temperature -25 0C to +55 0 C .

Storage Temperature -25 0C to +70 0 C .
Relative Humidity Up to 95% R .H .
Mountinct Details
18 . The unit can be bulkhead mounted rack (19 inch) mounted

or console mounted . When rack or console mounted a
bezel is to be used (See Fig N4) .
The unit is normally supplied with an 'H' frame already

fitted . This 'H' frame enables the unit to be mounted
without having to open it up and remove the electronic
assemblies . The 'H' frame does not have to be removed
if a bezel is used .
When mounting the unit care is to be taken to ensure
that there is sufficient clearance for the removal of
the front cover assembly (See Fig N5) .
III
134 s+
t LtS •' n
FIG N3 FIXING DETAILS OF CONTROL UNITS TYPE T880 AND T881

FITTED WITH 'H' FRAME
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 208

NES602
Issue 2
FIG N4 BEZEL MOUNTING DETAILS - FOR USE WITH CONTROL

UNITS TYPE T880 AND T881

NES602
Issue 2
4JO M
35&"m
OVERALL FRONT COVER

P GIfI ASSUABLY
FIG N5 CLEARANCE FOR REMOVAL OF FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY OF

CONTROL UNITS TYPE T880 AND T881
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 210

NES602
Issue 2
CableEntries
19 . The T880 has removable gland plates top and bottom of

the cabinet . The plates are to be drilled to take the
appropriate glands . When a bezel is to be fitted both
cabinet gland plates are to be removed . The removable
end plate on the bezel is to be drilled to take the
appropriate glands . The bezel can be fitted so that
the removable end plate is at the top or the bottom
(See Fig N4) .
Settincx-to-Work
Introduction
20 . The commissioning of the system comprises :
a . Checking that the installation is to

specification .
b. Insulation and continuity tests on cables,
detectors, callpoints and sounders .
c. Fitting all plug-in and electronic detectors .

d . Fitting sounder and detector circuit End-of-line
(EOL) units .
e. Checking of the controller, detectors and
sounders .
f. Trouble shooting for commissioning .
Testing Equipment
21 . An insulation tester and a multimeter are required for

commissioning . The multimeter must be rated in excess
of 20k ohm/volt .
Caution : High Voltage insulation testers must not be

used for testing circuits to which electronic
equipment, or other equipment equally
susceptible to damage, has already been
connected .

NES602
Issue 2
Preliminary Checks
22 . Perform the checks as detailed below :-
a . Check that no cables are connected to the

controller, that the power supplies are not
switched on and that the ribbon cables inside the
T880/T881 are not connected .
b . Check that all detector bases are correctly

installed and, where applicable, are fitted with
their plastic clip-on covers . Check also that no
plug-in detectors, no type D801/D802 detectors or
any other electronic detection devices are fitted .
c . Check that all other equipment is correctly

installed and is in the positions specified .
d . Check that the correct cables (screened where

necessary) having the correct number of cores have
been used and are correctly installed . Also check
that all necessary earthing has been correctly
carried out .
e . Check that suppression devices are fitted to all

sounder units and that, where necessary,
polarizing devices are fitted to all d .c .
auxiliary equipment, e .g . relays, etc .
f . At the controller, fit a Sounder EOL Unit across

each Sounder output terminal set (pin 1 positive,
pins 2 and 3 negative) .
9- Carry out continuity and insulation tests on all

circuits .
h . Compare the results with those recorded during

installation . If there is a significant
difference in any readings investigate the cause
and ensure that the defect is remedied .
J. Commission the T680 Power Supply Unit (See Annex

P) .
CAUTION : Do not connect the supply at the

controller .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 212

NES602
Issue 2
k. With the exception of the detection and sounder

circuits, make all connections, including those
from the T680 Power Supply Unit .
CAUTION : Do not switch on either supply after

connection .
Where more than one unit, or a combination of units, of

type T280, or Zone Output/Mimic Drive PEC is connected
to terminal R6, remove the 10k ohm end-of-line resistor
from each unit except the last in the chain (see UHM
1006/2 Fig 6 for T880 and UHM-1001/2 Fig 6 for T881) as
follows :
a T280/T281 - Cut pin 8 of resistor package 2
b Zone Output/Mimic Drive PEC - Remove R4

For full installation details see THORN SECURITY
Publication UHM1006/2 for T880 and UHM1001/2 for
T881 .
Setting Switches
23 . NOTE FOR T880 : The 32 available zones are grouped into
four sectors each of which contains eight zones, i .e .
1-8, 9-16, 17-24 and 25-32 . Complete sectors may be
made non-operative by the Sector Select switch block
S5 . The fitting of an end-of-line device at the zone
input terminals of an unused zone may be obviated by
'killing' that zone .
NOTE FOR T881 : The fitting of an end-of-line device at

the zone input terminal of an unused zone may be
obviated by 'killing' that zone . A zone may be
'killed' by the operation of the zone kill switch Si .
Zone kill does NOT however render a connected zone
inoperable . A singl zone may only be made inoperable
by electing and isolating it .
Fig N6 T880 and Fig 03 T881 show the position of the

various setting switches . Refer to these figures and
set the switches as indicated below .
a . Enable the Sector Enable Switches at S5
(ON position) T880 only
b. Set all Zone Switches (Si to S4) to KILL -
(ON position)

NES602
Issue 2
c. Set Switch S7 to SINGLE STAGE or 2 STAGE, as

required .
NOTE : Normally, select SINGLE-STAGE if a

continuous sounder output is required
and TWO-STAGE if ails ON/is OFF' pulsing
output is required .
d . Check that Switch S6 is in the MARINE position .
e . Connect G2 link if required . (This is achieved by

connecting the terminal marked G2 on terminal
block TBA to plug PLS Pin 3 of the Switch
Interface Module . Use a suitable connector) .
SECTOR ENABLE
SWITCHES
ENABLED ON
S5 F11 -
11
KILL OFF
LAND
2 STAGE
0 S6
0 MARINE
SINGLE STAGE
S1 S2 S3 S4
KILL ON
ENABLED 111111111 111111111 11111111 1111111111
OFF
ZONE KILL SWITCH
FIG N6 POSTION OF SETTING SWITCHES ON CONTROL UNIT TYPE

T880 PEC (SEE FIG 03 FOR T881)
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 214

NES602
Issue 2
Commissioning Checks
24 . WARNING : ALL POWER SUPPLIES TO THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE

SWITCHED OFF BEFORE A PANEL ELECTRONIC
CIRCUIT (PEC) OR ANY OTHER COMPONENT IS
FITTED, REMOVED OR REPLACED . CARE MUST BE
TAKEN WHEN HANDLING PECS TO AVOID PHYSICAL
DAMAGE OR BUILD-UP OF STATIC VOLTAGE
ANY AUXILIARY UNITS WHICH ARE CONNECTED MAY

OPERATE DURING THE COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE
UNLESS FIRST DISABLED BY WITHDRAWING FUSES,
ETC .
NOTE : If any check proves negative, identify and

correct the fault as described in THORN
SECURITY Publication UHM1001/4 for T881 and
UHM1006/4 for T880 .
The internal buzzer/sounders can generally be silenced

by operating the 'SILENCE ALARMS' switch whilst the
'CONTROL ENABLE' switch is operated . The internal
buzzer cannot be silenced if the controller is in an
alarm condition .
A zone may be put into an alarm condition by either

connecting a 560 ohm resistor across the zone terminals
or by directly activating a detector or callpoint .
a . First fit any special legend strips that may be
required .
(1) Use a box spanner to remove the nuts (2)

above and below the fixing screws and the
nuts (2) which hold the hinge to the side of
the front cover .
(2) Remove the moulding from the front cover to

expose the legend slots . Replace the
exisiting legend strips with the newly-marked
strips (as shown in Fig N2 for T880 and Fig
02 for T881) and reassemble the front cover
in the reverse order .
b . Connect cables to the plugs of the Controller PEC
Assembly as follows :-
(1) The ribbon cable of the left-hand terminal

field to plug PLB .

NES602
Issue 2
(2) The ribbon cable of the right-hand terminal

field to plug PLA .
(3) The twin cable from the Front Cover Assembly

to pins 1 and 2 PLH .
(4) The ribbon cable from the Front Cover

Assembly to pins 4 to 15 of PLH .
c . Check that a power supply connection for the

sounders has been made to BS+ and that the fault
input terminal R6 is connected .
d . Fit and connect the internal battery which is

supplied in the controller fitting kit . Check
that the internal sounder operates .
e . Switch on both the main and standby supplies .

Insert the key into the 'CONTROL ENABLE' switch
and turn it clockwise . Operate the 'SILENCE
ALARMS' and 'RESET' switches to stop the buzzer
and to eliminate any spurious start-up conditions .
Check that only the controller POWER ON indicator
lights . Check that the supply voltages are in
accordance with the specification .
f . Switch OFF the mains supply . Check that the MAINS

FAULT indicator lights . Restore the supply and
check that the MAINS FAULT indicator goes out .
g. Disconnect the Standby supply . Check that the

STANDBY SUPPLY FAULT indicator lights . Reconnect
the Standby Supply and check that the STANDBY
SUPPLY FAULT indicator goes out .
NOTE : At both f) and g), the buzzer will sound

during the fault condition and stop sounding
when supply is reconnected .
h . Where a Lamp Dim Module is fitted, check that the

output voltage of the module is at 27V + 0 .5V .
7 • Press the 'LAMP TEST' switch for at least two

seconds . Check that all the lamps light .
k . Press the 'LAMP ON' switch . Check that the light

intensity of the POWER ON indicator is immediately
reduced. Press the 'LAMP DIM' switch and check
that all the indicators now light at a reduced
intensity .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 216

NES602
Issue 2
1. Where a Lamp Dim Module is fitted, adjust

potentiometer RV1 to give the required light
intensity in the 'dimmed' condition . Do not
adjust RV2 .
M. Press the 'RESET' switch and check that the POWER

ON indicator immediately returns to full
intensity .
n . Remove a zone lamp . Check that the ZONE INDICATOR

FAULT and the common FAULT indicators both light .
Replace the zone lamp and check the indicators go
out .
p . Use a resistor to put zone 1 into alarm . Check

that the ZONE 1 indicator pulses, that the FIRE
indicator lights and that the buzzer sounds .
q. Operate the 'SILENCE ALARMS' switch . Check the
ZONE 1 indicator now lights continuously and that
the buzzer continues to sound .
r. Operate the 'RESET' switch . Check that both the
ZONE 1 and the FIRE indicators go out and that the
buzzer is silenced . If the buzzer does not
silence, again operate the 'SILENCE ALARMS'
switch .
s. In turn, put zones ,3,4,5,6,7 and 8 into alarm .

Check that the ZONE indicators pulse correctly .
Operate the 'SILENCE ALARMS' and 'RESET' switches
as at q) and r) to clear each zone .
t. Use the 'SELECT' switch to select zone 1 . press
the 'TEST' button . Check that the ZONE TEST
indicator lights and that the alphanumeric
indicator shows a '1' . Turn the 'CONTROL ENABLE'
switch key ANTI-CLOCKWISE .
u. Press 'TEST' switch . Check that ZONE 1 indicator

lights .
v . Put zone 1 again into alarm . Check that the ZONE

1 indicator lights for about four seconds and then
goes out .

NES602
Issue 2
we Turn the 'CONTROL ENABLE' switch key CLOCKWISE,

then press the 'CANCEL' switch and the 'ISOLATE'
switch in turn . Check that the ZONE TEST
indicator goes out and that the ZONE ISOLATE
indicator lights . Check that zone 1 cannot now be
put into an alarm mode . Press the 'CANCEL' switch
and check that the ISOLATE indicator goes out .
x . For each used zone in turn,

(1) Put the 'ZONE KILL' switch into the OFF
position .
(2) Check that the ZONE indicator and the

FAULT indicator light and that the
buzzer sounds . Silence the buzzer .
(3) Fit the EOL resistor across the last

detector in the zone .
(4) Connect the zone wiring to the correct
zone terminals in the controller -
ensure that polarity is correct .
(5) Check that the ZONE and FAULT indicators

go out .
(6) Select Zone Test for the particular zone

being installed, as detailed in Para t
above .
(7) Fit each detector in turn and check its

operation . Ensure that an alarm can be
given from each detector/callpoint .
Check that any indicator lamp that may
be fitted to a detector/callpoint lights
when the detector/callpoint goes into
alarm and remains lit for a period of
approximately four seconds .
NOTE : Where an indicator lamp is fitted into,

or adjacent to, a detection device,
there is no additional requirement to
check that the alarm condition has been
received at the controller . The
instruction to turn off the indicator is
given not be the detector but the
controller, subsequent to receipt of an
alarm from a zone in test .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 218

NES602
Issue 2
The indicator lamp will relight after 12

seconds if the alarm is still present .
It may be necessary to let a heat
detector cool down or to blow the freon
or smoke out of an ion-chamber or photo
electric smoke clear the alarm
condition .
CAUTION : Double-check that the 'ZONE KILL' switch

for each 'used' zone is now in the 'OFF'
(or down) position .
(8) Operate the 'SELECT' and 'CANCEL'
switches until all zones are normal .
Check that only the POWER ON indicator
is lit .
Y• Connect and commission any other equipment such as

the T280 or T281 Repeater Unit .
z . At the first sounder circuit input, remove the EOL
from the terminal field . Check that the SOUNDER
WIRING FAULT indicator on the controller lights
and that the controller internal buzzer sounds .
Operate the 'SILENCE ALARMS' switch . Fit the EOL
across the last sounder in the circuit . Connect
the sounder circuit to the terminal field and
check that the FAULT indicator goes out . Repeat
for the second sounder circuit .
aa . Warn personnel on board the vessel that alarm
testing is to be carried out ; check the time and
operate any detectors or alert callpoint . Check
locally that the sounders operate correctly .
Verify that after the preset sounder delay the
sounders change to give the Second Level alarm .
Note the time . Adjust the delay control if
necessary .
ba . Check the operation of each sounder in turn

throughout the vessel .
ca . Where an alarm callpoint is fitted and G2 is
connected, repeat para as but operate an alarm
callpoint . Check that all sounders operate
immediately . Silence the sounders and reset the
controller after the check .

NES602
Issue 2
da . Turn the 'CONTROL ENABLE' key anti-clockwise and

remove the key . Close the Front Cover Assembly
and secure it using two fixing screws . Remove the
transparent protection from the face of the
numeric display .
ea . After securing the front cover, leave both the

keyring, which holds two keys, and the Allen key,
which was originally taped to the back of the
controller housing, with the person who is
responsible for the-system .
Repeater Unit Tvpe T280
Function
25 . The T280 (Fig N7) is used to repeat, at a remote

location displays which originate at the T880 Control
Unit .
Description
26 . The Repeater Unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC

No . 508-013-002 .
27 . All the visual indicators are mounted on the front

cover of the unit and they mirror the visual indicators
on the T880 Control Unit (see para 5) .
28 . Under normal conditions only the POWER ON indicator

should be lit . If either the incoming power supply or
the internal regulator fail, the POWER ON indicator
will . turn off .
29 . The only control on the Repeater Unit is a pushbutton,

the prime function of which is to test the lamps .
Additionally, in a Fault condition operation of the
pushbutton will silence the internal buzzer . The
internal buzzer will also be silenced when the Control
Unit SILENCE ALARMS switch is operated . The internal
buzzer cannot be silenced in a fire condition . It will
only turn off when the Control Unit is returned to the
stand-by condition .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 220

NES602
Issue 2
\-1. /
ttEO"_r
FM
l am LAMPS
SPARE
-
TM
ICI

I FAULT
I
IIA14S
FAULT t.Ta I zow 1D
ta
YL . •i Y . i
MIME
t YL: ; i tl:
IEEE
Y4 ì
9W W r t.
YLi tl. ì
tl
W
tl ._ ; y
MMEM
tl. y Y
IME W
(w..s`
LAMP TEST
BUTTON
FIG N7 REPEATER UNIT TYPE T280
Installation
30 . The T880/T881 Control Unit has two sets of outputs to

drive Repeater Units or Mimic Panels . If more than one
Repeater Unit and/or Mimic Panel are connected to one
set of outputs they must be wired in series/parallel
and the resistor R2 removed from the PEC of each unit
except the last one (see Fig N8) .

NES602
Issue 2
IR2
b
C7 IC5
1
R2 1T
R13
C
TR1 DcT T
b
1 2 3 4 5 6
TB1
OV 28V OV R6 R3 R1
O\(28V OV R6 R3 R1
CUT END PIN No 8

OF RESISTOR PACK R2
FIG N8 POSITION OF MONITOR RESISTOR R2
31 . The Repeater must be solidly earthed .
32 . Screened cable MUST be used between the Repeater and

the Control Unit .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 222

NES602
Issue 2
Variable Legend,
33 . As with the T880 all of the legend strips on the T280

are removable (see para 6) . The method of removal and
insertion of replacement strips is the same as the
T880 (see para 24 (a) and Fig N2) .
All T280's are supplied with legend strips giving Zones

1 to 32 so if an extension Control Unit is being used
i .e . one from zones 33 to 64 then replacement legend
strips labelled 33 to 64 must be fitted to any Repeater
Unit fitted to the extension unit .
Inputs
34 . The repeater data output from the T880 Control Unit is

multiplexed, and is transmitted to the T280 on a 4 core
screened cable .
The power supply can either be taken from the T880 by

adding one additional core to the signalling multicore
or from a local 22 to 32V dc with a maximum ripple
content of 100mV at maximum rated current .
Current Consumption
35 . a. Standby 200mA
b. Standby with either main or standby

supply failure at the Control unit 280mA
c. Alarm Currents
Common load 360mA
Load per zone in alarm 40mA
d. Lamp test 2 .2A
(1 .5A T281)
36 . a . Overall Dimensions
(1) Housing without 'HI frame
Height 385mm
Width 398mm
Depth 95mm

NES602
Issue 2
(2) 'H' Frame

Height 339mm
Width 458mm
Thickness 13mm
NOTE : The T280 and T281 are normally supplied

with the 'H' frame fitted .
b Weights
Complete unit without frame 5 .5kg

Complete unit with frame 9 .Okg
Environmental Characteristics
37 . Operating temperature -100C to +55 0 C
Storage temperature -200 C to +70 00
Relative Humidity up to 95% R .H .
Mounting Details
38 . The mounting of this unit is the same as for the T880

Control Unit except that the overall depth with 'H'
Frame is 108mm (see Fig N3 and para 18) .
Clearance for the removal of the front cover is given

in Fig N4 except that the 540mm now becomes 465mm .
The bezel mounting details are as shown in Fig N5

except that the depth now becomes 40mm .
Cable Entries
39 . Cable entries are as for the T880 (see para 19) .
Interconnections
40 . For the T280 Repeater, a supply may be obtained from

the 28V terminal of the T880 Controller provided
sufficient power is available . If the power is not
available, use another 24V (nom .) source, e .g . a
further T680 PSU . If a further T680 is installed, use
only the LA or the LB output .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 224

NES602
Issue 2
Setting to Work
41 . a. Check that the T880/881 Control Unit has been

commissioned and is powered up .
b. Fit any special legend strips that may be required

(see Fig N2 for T280 and Fig 02 for T281 and para
24
c. Check that switch S1 on the PEC is in the DOWN
position (see Fig N9) .
d. If a number of units are to be connected to the

data lines ensure that the appropriate monitor
resistor is removed (see para 30) .
e .' Connect the cable from the Front Cover Assembly to

plug PL1 on the PEC .
f. Connect the external cables between the repeater,

the dc supply and the Controller .
9- If applicable, switch ON the d .c . supply . Check

that the POWER ON indicator lights .
h . Operate the 'LAMP TEST' button and check that all

indicator lamps light .
7 Remove a zone indicator lamp and check that both

the common FAULT and the ZONE INDICATOR FAULT
indicators light and that the buzzer sounds .
Replace the lamp and check that the indicator
lights go out and the buzzer silences .
k . At the Controller insert the control key and turn

it clockwise . Operate the 'SELECT' switch and
check that the Repeater ZONE lamps light in the
correct sequence .
1 . Return the Control key at the Controller to its

original position and remove it .

NES602
Issue 2
LP LP
if 0
D5 -Cal-
D6 -C21-
*+ ~A
0 SWITCH S1
Sl
LP LP DOWN
0 0
FIG N9 POSITION OF SWITCH S1
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 226

NES602
Issue 2
StockCodesfor T880 System
42 . Stock Codes for items referred to in this Annex and

other associated items .
Item NSN THORN SECURITY SC NO .
Controller Type T880 MK2 6320-99-778-4582 508-013-012

Repeater Type T280 508-013-002
T880 Extension Unit (33-64) 508-013-041
T880 Front Cover 6320-99-251-4037 509-013-002
T880 Electronic Assembly 6320-99-778-4583 509-013-041
T880 Terminal Field 'A' 6320-99-759-9582 509-013-048
T880 Terminal Field 'E' 6320-99-251-4036 509-013-061
T880 Spares Kit 6320-99-796-1103 509-013-055
T280 Front Cover 509-013-004
T280 Electronic Assembly 509-013-024
T280 Spares Kit 509-013-028
T880 Battery Kit 6320-99-775-3891 509-013-001
Variable Legend Kit 509-013-121
Mounting Bezel-Deep 401-011-008
Mounting Bezel-Shallow 401-011-009
Sounder End-of-line Pkt 8 6320-99-759-9581 509-013-031
T880/280 Plug in Lamp Pkt 8 509-013-030
Additional Information on T880 and T280
43 . For additional more detailed information on these units

refer to :-
T880 THORN SECURITY Publication Nos UHM 1006/1 to 5

and UHM 1006 A/1 to 3
T280 THORN SECURITY Publication Nos UHM 1007/1 to 5
and UHM 1007A/1 and 2 .

NES602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX N 228

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEX O
General
1 . The control and indicating unit Type T881 is basically a sub-

assembled T880 which is detailed in Annex N . Throughout this
Annex references will be made to paragraphs in Annex N where
there is uniformity between the T881 and the T880 . This Annex
will mainly highlight the differences between the two units .
Function
2 . The control and indicating unit type T881 (Fig 01) provides logic
functions, visual indications and user controls for an automatic
fire detection system of between four and eight zones . For
systems with up to four zones use a T882 control unit (see Annex
Q) and for systems with over eight zones use a T880 control unit
(see Annex N) .
3 . The T881 is used in conjunction with a power supply unit type

T680 (Annex P) and a repeater unit type T281 (para 21 of this
Annex) .
Description
4. The control unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 508-013-017
NSN 6320-99-759-9580 .
5 . All the visual indicators and user controls are mounted on the
front cover of the unit and are the same as on the T880 (see para
5a and b Annex N) except that there are only eight zone lamps .
These zones lamps are numbered from left to right and not from
top to bottom in groups of four as on the T880 .
MODNESS/602/2/1990 229 ANNEX 0

NES602
Issue 2
Numerical
indicator
FIG01CONTROL AND INDICATING UNIT TYPE T881
Variable Legend
6. This is the same facility as on the T880 (see para 6 Annex N)

except that zone strip is inserted from the side of the front
cover assembly . (see Fig 02) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 0 230

NES602
Issue 2
RED WHITE WHITE
AMBER AMBER WHITE
ZONE STRIP
IS WHITE
'POWER ON'
STRIP IS GREEN
SWITCH LEGEND STRIP IS WHITE,

WITH A CUT-OUT FOR THE
ZONE NUMERIC INDICATOR.
FIG 02 INSERTION OF LEGEND STRIPS
Specification,
General
7 . The control and indicating unit type T881 is a ., self monitoring

fire detection unit designed for use in marine environments and
to withstand shock and vibration and provides :
a. monitoring for eight fire protection zones,
b . an isolation and testing facility for each of those eight

zones,

NES602
Issue 2
c. two monitored sounder circuits,
d . a multiplexed output drive for associated units such as

Repeater Units Type T281, or zone output/mimic drive PEC
(see para 10) -
e . fire and general fault volt-free change-over contacts

f . eight individual zone output volt-free change-over contacts .
Terminal Fields
8 The standard T881 is fitted with two terminal fields .
a . Terminal field 'A' contains the terminals for the zone

wiring, sounder circuit outputs, multiplexed repeater
outputs, fire and general fault volt-free change-over
outputs and power inputs .
b . The zonal output module PEC carries terminal blocks for

connection of the eight zone outputs .
Sounder Outputs
9 . Sounder outputs are the same as for the T880 (see para 9 Annex
N) .
Other Inputs and Outputs
10 . These inputs and outputs are the same as for the T880
(see para 10 Annex N) except for zonal outputs para 10e
Annex N . The T881 has a dedicated output relay for each
of the eight zones . These relays are mounted on the
zonal output module PEC (see para 8b above) . Each relay
has a single-pole voltage-free change-over contact set
rated 1A 30Vdc . The relays. energize on an alert or
alarm signal being raised in the relevant zone and de-
energize on reset .
Fault Monitoring and Indication
11 . The same as the T880 (see para 11 Annex N) .

Other Facilities
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 0 232

NES602
Issue 2
Detector Capability

PowerSuDD1vRecruirements
14 . There are two separate power supply inputs to the T881 Controller
from the T680 Power Supply Unit .
a LA : This is the main supply to the electronic

and, through it, the detection devices .
b LB : This is the supply to the internal lamps in

the T881 . This supply would be switched by
the lamp dim output (LC) to provide one
voltage to the lamps for full brilliance and
another, lower, voltage for lamp dim .
NOTE : Supplies must have a common ov .
All supplies may float relative to earth .
Control Unit Power Unit SuDDly Ratings
15 a Voltage LA LB
Nominal Voltage 26V
Nominal Voltage
(Normal Brilliance) - 26V
Nominal Voltage (Lamps Dimmed) - 15V
Maximum Voltage 32V 32V

(see note 1)
Minimum Voltage
23V 6V
(see note 2)
Maximum Ripple Content 1OOmV pk
NOTE : 1 Lamp life reduced

2 Lamp intensity reduced
CAUTION : The T680 does not regulate or smooth the emergency

supply . This supply must therefore lie within the
limits as given above for 'LA' .

NES602
Issue 2
b. Current Consumption - Quiescent
NOTE : All currents are measured at a nominal voltage of 26V

from LA and LB .
LA LB
(1) Main Electronics
Normal Condition (Enable Key Off) 165mA 75mA

Mains Failure (Enable Key Off) 85mA 140mA
Lamp Test (Enable Key On) 153mA 1160mA
(2) Per Detection Zone Used
End of line device 4mA

Maximum current drawn by detector . 3mA
Total maximum current/zone 7mA
(3) Total Maximum Quiescent Current
(Main Electronics plus 8 zones)
Normal 150mA 70mA

Mains Failure 140mA 135mA
Lamp Test 210mA 1160mA
c. Current Consumption - Alarm
NOTE : All currents are measured at a nominal voltage of

26V from LA and LB .
LA LB
(1) Main Electronics 295mA 208mA
(2) Per Zone
Alarm
Callpoint Operated 50mA 38mA
MODNES/602/2/199 0
ANNEX 0 234

NES602
Issue 2
Alert Callpoint or
Detector Operated 25mA 38mA
Zone not in alarm 7mA -
(3) Total Alarm Current
Main Electronics + 2 zones in

alert + 6 zones not in alarm 387mA 285mA
Main Electronics + 8 zones in

alert 495mA 512mA
d. Sounder Supply (BS) and Auxiliary Supplies (+28V),
The current requirements for these supplies will be dictated

by the current drawn by the devices connected to these
outputs . (see para 9 Annex N)
(1) Housing without 'H' frame
Height 385mm
Width 400mm
Depth : 171mm
(2) 'H Frame
Height 339mm
Width 458mm
Thickness : 13mm
NOTE :, The T881 is normally supplied with the 'H' frame

fitted
b. Weights
Complete unit without frame 10kg

Complete unit with frame 13 .5kg
17 . Operating Temperature -25 0C to +55 0C

Storage Temperature -250C to +70 0C
Relative Humidity Up to 95% R .H .

NES602
Issue 2
Mounting Details
18 . The unit can be bulkhead mounted, rack (19 inch) mounted or
console mounted . See para 18 Annex N for full details .
Cable Entries
19 . The-arrangements for cable entries are the same as for the T880
(see para 19 Annex N) .
Settina to Work
20 . The setting to work of the T881 is the same as for the T880 . See
paras 20 to 24 Annex N for full details .
LAND
O S6
O MARINE
2 STAGE .
O = S7
SINGLE STAGE
S1
K1LL
ENABLED 111111111
S8
8 ZONES
ZONE KILL SWITCH
FIG 03 POSITION OF SETTING SWITCHES ON CONTROL UNIT TYPE T881
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 0 236

NES602
Issue 2
Repeater Unit Type T281
Function
21 . The T281 (Fig 04) is used to repeat, at a remote location

displays which originate at the T881 Control Unit .
Description
22 . The Repeater Unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 508-013-

020 NSN 6320-99-763-1019 .
23 . All the visual indicators are mounted on the front cover and they
mirror the visual indicators on the T881 Control Unit .
24 . Under normal conditions only the POWER ON indicator should be

lit . If either the incoming power supply or the internal
regulator fails, the POWER ON indicator will turn off .
25 . The only control on the Repeater Unit is a push button, the prime
function of which is to test the lamps . Additionally, in a fault
condition, operation of the push button will . silence the internal
buzzer . The internal buzzer will also be silenced when the
SILENCE ALARM switch is operated at the Control Unit . The
internal buzzer cannot be silenced in a fire condition . It will
only turn off when the Control Unit is returned to the stand-by
condition .

NES602
Issue 2
I FIRE FIRE I SPARE

IF
ALA I ALERT T.AYPS TEST
I FAMT ta
YAW
I FAULT LA El I
ZONE
IM
MMMMMMM
LAMP TEST
BUTTON
FIG 04 REPEATER UNIT TYPE T281
Installation
26 . The installation of the T281 is the same as the T280 . See paras
30 to 32 Annex N for details .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 0 238

NES602
Issue 2
Variable Legend
27 . As with the T881 all of the legend strips on the T281, are
removable . The method of removal and insertion of replacement
strips is the same as for the T880 . See para 24(a) Annex N and
Fig 02 in this Annex .
Inputs
28 . The repeater data output from the T881 Control Unit is
multiplexed, and is transmitted to the T281 on a 4 core screened
cable .
The power supplies can either be taken from the T881 by adding
one additional core to the signalling multicore or from a local
22 to 32 Vdc with a maximum ripple content of 100mV at maximum
rated current .
Current Consumption
29 . The same as for the T280 (see para 35 Annex N) .
Mountina Details
Cable Entries
Interconnections
Setting to Work

NES602
Issue 2
Stock Codes for T881 System
36 . Item SSN THORN SECURITY SC NO .
Controller Type T881 6320-99-759-9580 508-013-017

Repeater Type T281 6320-99-763-1019 508-013-020
T881 Front Cover 6320-99-759-9588 509-013-051
T881 Electronic Assy 6320-99-759-9622 509-013-045
T881 Terminal Field 'A' 6320-99-759-9582 509-013-048
.T881 Terminal Field
Zonal O/P 6320-99-759-9583 509-013-050
T881 Spares Kit 6320-99-773-5682 509-013-056
T881 Battery Kit 6320-99-796-1103 509-013-001
T281 Front Cover 6320-99-763-1020 509-013-052
T281 Electronic Assy 6320-99-759-9564 509-013-047
T281 Spares Kit 6320-99-764-6480 509-013-057
Variable Legend Kit 509-013-121
Mounting Bezel Deep 401-011-008
Mounting Bezel Shallow 401-011-009
Sounder End of Line Pk8 6320-99-759-9581 509-013-031
T881/281 plug in lamps Pk8 509-013-030
Additional Information on T881 and T281
37 . For additional more detailed information on these units refer to :
T881 THORN SECURITY Publication Nos UHM1001/1 to 5 and

UHM 1001A/1 to 3
T281 THORN SECURITY Publication Nos UHM1007/1 to 5 and UHM

1007A/1 and 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX 0 240

NES 602
Issue 2
ANNEX P
POWER SUPPLY UNIT TYPE T680
Function
1 . The Power Supply Unit type T680 (Fig P1) derives power for the
type T880 (Annex N) or type T881 (Annex 0) Controller and the
type T280 or T281 Repeater from the ship's mains supply .
2 . In the event of mains failure the unit automatically changes over

to the ship's dc supply .
3. In the event of mains or standby supply failure the unit

generates a fault signal for display on the Controller .
4 . Provides a dimming circuit for the lamps in the controller .

NOTE : If a T680 is not used and the Controller is powered
either from a battery and charger or from the ship's
dc supply a lamp dim PEC can be fitted in the Controller
(see Annex S) .
Description
5 . The Power Supply Unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No

508 .013 .016 NSN 6130-99-778-4530 .
6 . There are no visual indicators or user controls on the unit .
7 . The mains supply is fed to two separate regulators to obtain the

T880/T881 Controller electronics supply LA and lamp supply LB .
Regulation of LB enables the Controller lamps to be
dimmed/restored to full brightness by operating the Controller
lamp dim/reset switches .
8 . The standby supply is not regulated by LA and is connected

directly by RLA to the Controller .
MODNES/602/2/1990 241 ANNEX P

NES602
Issue 2
ETHOR;i Y 13
-
113 T680 POWER UNIT M-3

FIG P1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT TYPE T680
Electrical - Characteristics,
9 . The Power Supply Unit inputs are :
a . 120/240V + 20% at 50/60Hz
b . 24Vdc nominal
c . 5Vdc nominal - the lamp dim signal LC from the Controller
NOTE : The ship's 24Vdc supply does not pass through the
regulator circuit - therefore it is essential that :
(1) a maximum voltage of 32Vdc is not exceeded .
(2) the ripple content of the supply does not exceed 100mV .
10 . The Power Supply Unit outputs are :
a. 22 Vdc nominal at 2 .5A - Controller supply LA
b. (1) 26 Vdc nominal at 2 .5A - Controller supply LB

(Controller input signal LC low)
(2) 15Vdc nominal at 2 .5A - Controller supply LB

(Controller input signal LC high)
C. 26Vdc nominal - standby supply fault output
d. 26Vdc nominal - mains supply fault output
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX P 242

NES 602
Issue 2
11 . a. Overall Dimensions
(1) Housing without mounting bars
Height 267mm
Width 398mm
Depth 171mm
(2) Mounting bars
Height 214mm
Width 470mm
Thickness 13mm
NOTE : The T680 is normally supplied with the
mounting bars fitted
b. Weight
Complete unit without bars 14 .0kg

Complete unit with bars 16 .0kg
12 . Operating Temperature -25 °C to +55 °C

Storage Temperature -25 °C to +70 °C
Relative Humidity Up to 95% RH
Mounting Details
13 . The unit can be bulkhead mounted, rack (19 inch) mounted or

console mounted . When rack or console mounted a bezel is to be
used .

NES602
Issue 2
470
18 434
398 184
L J
FIG P2 FIXING DETAILS OF POWER SUPPLY UNIT

TYPE T680 FITTED WITH MOUNTING BARS
Cable Entries
14 . The T680 has removable gland plates top and bottom of the
cabinet . The plates are to be drilled to take the appropriate
glands . When a bezel is to be fitted both cabinet gland plates
are to be removed . The removable end plate on the bezel is to be
drilled to take the appropriate glands .
Settina to Work
15 . The commissioning of the unit comprises :
a. checking the installed unit is to specification

b. installation and continuity tests on cables
c. connection of cables
16 . A megger and multimeter are required . The meter must be rated

in excess of 20k ohm/volt .
17 . Carry out continuity and installation tests on all cables .
18 . Connect the cables to the unit as shown in Fig P3 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX P 244

NES 602
Issue 2
STANDBY MAINS
SUPPLY SUPPLY
MAINS
TERMINAL
790
BLOC(
POWER POWER UN MMES

SUPPLY P.C•B• ASSEMBLY
MODULE
OV LB LC LA PSF F
70 TYPE 71leo
CONTROLLER
FIG P3 T680 POWER SUPPLY UNIT INTERCONNECTIONS
19 . Switch on the mains •a nd standby supplies . Check that the dc

voltages at terminals .
LA = 22V
LB = 15V
PSF = 0V
F = 0V
Stock Codes for T680
20 . Item NSN THORN SECURITY SC NO
Type T680 Power Supply Unit 6130-99-778-4530 508 .013 .016

T680 Power Supply Unit PEC 6130-99-778-4531 509 .013 .082
T680 Spares Kit 6320-99-763-1011 509 .013 .026
Additional Information on T680
21 . For additional more detailed information on this unit refer to

THORN SECURITY Publication UHM 1002 .

NES602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX P 246

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEX 0
Function
1 . The Control Unit type T882 (Fig Q1) provides logic functions,
visual indications and user controls for an automatic fire
detection system of up to four zones . For systems with more than
four zones use the T881 (see Annex 0) for systems between five
and eight zones and the T880 (see Annex N) for systems of over
eight zones .
2 . The T882 is used in conjunction with a Repeater Unit type T282

(para 25) .
Description
3 . The Control Unit is supplied in three versions .
a . With an internal power unit . The unit operates from the

ship's ac mains supply and changes over to the ship's 24Vdc
supply in the event of mains failure .
With an internal power unit . The unit operates from the

ship's ac mains supply and changes over the 24Vdc internal
batteries in the event of mains failure . The internal power
unit provides the charge to the batteries .
c . Without an internal power unit . The unit operates directly

from the ship's 24Vdc supply or a suitable external battery
and charger .
NOTE : The T882 with integral power unit is supplied in a

deep housing (housing types) and without a power unit in a
shallow housing (housing type 6) .
4 . The three versions of the T882 are supplied to the following

stock codes .
a . With internal power unit

THORN SECURITY SC No . 508 .013 .030
NSN 6320-99-252-3627
MODNES/602/2/1990 247 ANNEX Q

NES 602
Issue 2
b. With internal batteries as (a) plus 4 x 6V 9 .5AH
batteries THORN SECURITY SC No . 560 .001 .013
Battery fixing kit THORN SECURITY SC No . 509 .013 .071
c . Without power unit-24Vdc
THORN SECURITY SC 508 .013 .031
NSN 6320-99-796-8392
5 . All the visual indicators and user controls are mounted on the
front cover of .the unit .
a. Visual Indicators
POWER ON (green) - 1 bulb
FIRE (red) - 2 bulbs
FAULT (amber) - 1 bulb . This indicator will
illuminate if there is a fault in the control unit ; if
there is a short or open circuit on the zone wiring ; if a
detector has been removed ; or if one of the bulbs in the
control unit has blown . If the bulb in the fault indicator
has blown there will be no visual indication of fault but
the internal buzzer will sound . Operation of the lamp test
switch will show which bulb has blown .
SOUNDER WIRING FAULT (Amber) - 1 bulb . This indicator will
illuminate if there is a short or open circuit in either of
the sounder circuits .
ZONE TEST (White) - 1 bulb . This indicator will illuminate
if one or more zones are put into the test mode .
ZONE ISOLATE (White) - 1 bulb . This indicator will
illuminate if one or more zones are isolated .
ZONE - 4 of f (White) - 1 bulb . When the control unit
receives a fire signal from a detector or a call-point the
main FIRE indicator will illuminate and the relevant ZONE
indicator(s) will flash . When the alarm is accepted, by
operating the SILENCE ALARM Switch the Zone indicator will
become steady . Any new alarm will cause the relevant Zone
indicator to flash and the sounders will operate .
Acceptance of this new alarm is as above .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 248

NES602
Issue 2
NOTE : All fault conditions will cause the internal
buzzer to operate . This can be silenced by
operating the SILENCE ALARM Switch . A fire
condition will also operate the internal
buzzer but in this condition it cannot be
silenced, until the control unit is reset and
returns to the normal stand-by condition . If
the control unit is in an abnormal condition,
ie : in fault or one or more zones are
isolated or in the test mode the internal
buzzer will operate every 30 minutes .
b . User Controls
With the exception of the key operated ENABLE switch all

user control is by membrane - operated press switches . In
the normal state all user controls, except lamp dim are
inhibited, although TEST and ISOLATE switches may be used to
determine the zone test/zone isolate status ie : the switches
are usable for interrogation purposes only . The ENABLE key
enables all User Controls .
ZONE SELECT
This switch is used to pre-select a zone which may

subsequently be put into a "Test" or "Isolate" mode, or be
cancelled from such a mode . The switch must be depressed
until the indicator of the zone to be tested (isolated, etc)
lights up .
ZONE TEST
This switch will put into the "Test" mode that zone pre-
selected by use of the "ZONE SELECT" switch - provided that
the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch is operated (ie : turned to the
'ON' position) . If the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch has, however,
not been operated, the switch causes the zone indicator of
any zone which is currently in the "Test" mode to light for
approximately two seconds . Any number of zones may be put
into the "Test" mode at the same time .
ZONE ISOLATE
This switch will put into the "Isolate" mode that zone pre-
selected by use of the "ZONE SELECT" switch - provided that
the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch is operated (ie : turned to the

NES 602
Issue . 2
'ON' position) . If the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch has,
however, not been operated, the switch causes the zone
indicator of any zone which is currently in the "Isolated"
mode to light for approximately two seconds . Any number of
zones may be put into the "Isolated" mode at the same time .
CANCEL
This switch will cancel a "Test" or an "Isolate" condition
currently existing on that zone pre-selected by the zone
"SELECT" switch . The "CONTROL ENABLE" switch must first be
operated . The indicator of the zone which is being
cancelled lights for two seconds after the switch has been
released .
NOTE If a zone which is in an alarm condition is
removed from "Test" or "Isolate", a FULL alarm
will be raised .
LAMP TEST/DIM
This switch permits all indicators to light for two seconds,
gradually reduces their intensity over three seconds and
then gradually increases their intensity again over three
seconds . Provided that the switch remains operated, the
cycle will repeat after a two second delay . Indicators will
subsequently light at the intensity prevailing at the time
the switch was released .
SILENCE ALARMS
Permits alarm sounders, warning sounders, and any other
equipment which may be connected to the "Fire Silencable"
ouput, to be cancelled (or switched off) . Further alarm,
alert and warning conditions will restart the appropriate
sounder(s), and possibly the other connected equipment,
until the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch is again operated .
Exceptionally, in a fire alarm condition, the internal
buzzer cannot be silenced until the controller itself has
been reset .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 250
NES602
Issue 2
RESET
Returns the controller to the normal state after an alarm .

The alarm sounders must be silenced by use of the "SILENCE
ALARMS" switch before the controller can be reset . Alarm
indications will clear when the "RESET" switch is operated
but, if an alarm condition still exists or is again
detected, the indicator for the affected zone(s) will
relight in the original pulsing mode .
If the requirement for latching faults has been selected,

this switch will return the controller to the normal state
after a fault . The fault sounder must, however, be silenced
by use of the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch before the controller
can be reset . Fault indications will clear when the "RESET"
switch is operated but, if a fault condition still exists,
the fault indication will remain and the internal fault
buzzer re-sound .
FIG Q1 CONTROL UNIT TYPE T882

NES 602
Issue 2
6. The main electronic assembly is mounted on the back of the front

cover . A protective cover is mounted over the back of the
assembly .
7. When fitted, the power unit is mounted in the back of the housing
on the right hand side .
8 . When fitted the batteries are mounted on the left hand side of
the housing .
Specification
General
9 . The Control Unit type T882 is a micro-processor based self-
monitoring fire detection unit designed for use in marine
environments .
Sounder Outputs
10 . a . First Level Alarm
"First Level" alarm is produced by the primary alarm sounder
output SDR .1 . The output may be selected as continuous or
pulsing by the fitting of an option link on the processor
PEC . Initiated by an alarm signal and maintained until the
"SILENCE ALARMS" switch is operated, the output is a
switched 24V dc capable of supplying up to lA to an external
circuit of alarm sounders, eg : 18 standard 6" bells .
Pulsing, where selected, is at the rate of is ON/is OFF .
If the "First Level" alarm is not silenced within a preset
period, the output condition changes to "Second Level"
alarm . The preset (or delay) period is set by a
potentiometer, accessible on the terminal field . The delay
available is adjustable from 0 to 3 minutes, and is referred
to as the "Sounder 2 Delay" . The sounder delay may be
overridden by operating an alarm callpoint .
b. Second Level Alarm
This condition is initiated :-
(1) instantly, by the operation of an alarm callpoint,
or
(2) automatically, after the "sounder delay"
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 252

NES602
Issue 2
The "Second Level" alarm consists of the primary sounder

output SDR .1, together with the secondary sounder output
SDR .2 . The secondary sounder output may be selected
(independently of the primary alarm sounder output) as
continuous or pulsing by the fitting of an option link on
the processor PEC . Again, where selected, pulsing is at the
rate of is ON/is OFF .
The wiring to both primary and secondary sounders is

monitored for open and short-circuit and for the presence of
at least one sounder . Each output is separately fused at
2A .
NOTE : The following points should'be noted :
1 . An alarm callpoint will cause the "Second Level"

alarm to operate immediately - irrespective of
whether or not a "First Level" alarm has been
raised .
2 . An output is latched into the alarm state

until the"SILENCE ALARMS" switch is operated .
3 . Devices connected to the sounder outputs must be

suppressed and polarized . The standard range of
bells and Banshee sounders as supplied by THORN
SECURITY are suitable . Sirens, generally, are not
supplied suppressed and polarized and can only be
connected to the control unit via a suitable relay .
Other Outputs
Alarm Outputs
11 . The following alarm outputs are provided :
Fire - Relay output rated 1A at 30V

dc,resistive, single pole c/o .
Fire Silencable - Relay output rated 1A at 30V

resistive, single pole c/o .
Zone Output (4 in no .
- one per zone) - Relay output rated 1A at
30Vdc, resistive . (Energize
on alarm) . Voltage free, single
pole c/o .

NES 602
Issue 2
All alarm outputs, except for "Fire Silencable" , latch

until the "SILENCE ALARMS" and "RESET" switches are
operated in sequence . "Fire Silencable" will clear
when the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch is operated .
Faults Outputs
12 . Common Fault - Relay output rated 1A at
30V dc, resistive . (Normally
energized - voltage free,
single pole c/o) .
The Fault output condition may be preselected as latching or
non-latching by a link inside the unit . With the link at
OFF, the output does not latch and the relay will re-
energize when the fault is removed .
Repeater Outputs
13 . The following voltage-free, single-pole, relay outputs rated

1A at 30V dc resistive are provided for operating a Repeater
Unit type T282 . If a Repeater Unit is not be installed, the
outputs may be used to control other suitable devices, if so
required .
Zone 1, Zone 2, Zone 3 - Normally open contacts

and Zone 4 which operate under Alarm &
Fault conditions .
Test/Isolate - Normally open contacts which
operate when controller is
in TEST or ISOLATE mode .
Fire - Normally open contacts which
operate under alarm conditions
Fault - Changeover contacts, normally
energized, which operate for a
fault condition .
NOTE : . All outputs are switched to COMMON . Terminal
markings 'Fault' and 'No Fault' are applicable to
the normal, power on, quiescent condition .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 254

NES602
Issue 2
Detector Capability
Number of Detectors
14 . The maximum number of detectors and/or callpoints that may be

connected to any one zone is limited by two factors :
a . good fire engineering practice
b . the quiescent current drawn by the detectors and
callpoints
Only the second is directly concerned with the actual operation

of the controller . The total permitted quiescent current for all
the devices on any one zone is 3mA maximum .
Nominal quiescent currents for typical devices are as follows :
a. 100uA
F712M Ion Chamber Smoke Detector

M300 Series Detectors
D801 Heat Detector
b. 150uA
D802 Heat Detector

S610 Flame Detector
c. Zero Current
Normally open contact thermal switch devices such as types H600,

H601, H602, H900, H901 and H902,
Normally open contact manual alarm callpoints such as the CP200,

CP230, CP250 and CP260 .
PowerSuDnlyRequirements
15 . For the integral power supply unit, the T882 requires an input of
110/220V ac +20% at 50-60Hz and either :
a . an internal 24V (nominal) lead-acid battery, or
b . a separate, external, 24V (nominal) dc supply . If this
supply is derived from a secondary battery, the battery may
be of the lead acid or nickel alkaline type .

NES 602
Issue 2
The particular arrangement used must be confirmed by link options

on the processor board .
Power Supply Ratings
16 . a. Voltage
Nominal operating voltage - 27V

Maximum operating voltage - 32V
Minimum operating voltage - 23V
Maximum ripple content - 100mV pk
b. Current Consumption - Ouiescent
(1) Main Electronics :
Normal condition - 140m
Mains or standby supply

- fault condition - 126mA
Lamp test operated
(in addition to above) - 400mA
(2) Per Detection Zone Used :,
End-of-Line Device - 4mA
Maximum current of detectors - 3mA
Total maximum current/zone - 7mA
(3) Total Maximum Quiescent Current (Main Electronics

plus 4 zones),
Normal - 168MA
Supply fault - 154mA
(4) Maximum Current Available from PSU - 2 .5A
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 256

NES602
Issue 2
C. Current Consumption-Alarm
The Alarm current is equal to the quiescent current :
plus 200mA
plus 100mA per zone in alarm
plus Alarm sounder current
plus Any other auxiliary alarm loads
Deep Box with P . U . Shallow Box without P .U .,
Height - 267mm - 267mm

Width - 398mm - 398mm
Depth - 187mm - 101mm
b. Weights
Complete unit - 11 .5kg 8 .8kg

Front Cover Assembly - 2 .5kg 2 .5kg
18 . Temperature - Operating - -25 0 C to +55 °C

- Storage - -25 ° C to +70 0C
Relative Humidity - Up to 97% R .H .
Mounting Details
19 . The controller will be supplied fitted into a deep-housing unit

or, if the battery/charger assembly is not required, into a
shallow-housing unit . It is supplied fully assembled . Although
removal of the front cover is recommended for fitting purposes,
disassembly is not necessary . The batteries are not supplied
with the controller .
Ensure that the position in which the controller is to be fitted

allows adequate clearance for cables and for opening the Front
Cover Assembly, (see Fig Q3) . Where batteries (which must be
separately ordered) are to be fitted internally, wiring entry
must be restricted to the right hand side of the top and bottom
plates of the housing . Cable gland plates are not provided for
the shallow housing, which has knockouts, but are supplied as
standard for the deep housing .

NES 602
Issue 2
Setting to Work
Introduction
20 . The setting to work of the system comprises :
a. checking that the installation is to specification

b. insulation and continuity tests on cables
c. fitting of option links
d. checking of controller, detectors and sounders
e. trouble shooting for commissioning
E
E 398M M
to
N
E
E NE
E
N
t0 N
N
30mm
I - 159mm
368mm
FIG Q2 FIXING DETAILS OF CONTROL UNIT TYPE T882
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 258

NES602
Issue 2
r"
A
--------------
I
II
II
II
I1 E
FROM COVER COVER il
ASSa46LY S CI I
II
II
II
II ~~
II i-
II _- 1
NOTE- DfANSONS N mm'a
HOUSNO A C D
TYPE 8 E
14K MAX . MN. MAX.
3 & 6 101 396 440 610 45 80 487
8 ! 7 187 610 130 145
FIG Q3 CLEARANCE FOR REMOVAL OF FRONT COVER ASSEMBLY

OF CONTROL UNIT TYPE T882
Test Eauipment
21 . An insulation tester and a multimeter are required for

commissioning . The multimeter must be rated in excess of 20k
ohm/volt .
CAUTION :, HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION TESTERS MUST NOT BE USED FOR

THE TESTING OF ANY CIRCUITS TO WHICH ELECTRONIC
EQUIPMENT, OR OTHER EQUIPMENT EQUALLY SUSCEPTIBLE TO
DAMAGE, HAS ALREADY BEEN CONNECTED .

NES 602
Issue 2
Preliminary Checks,
22 . NOTE : When working on the unit, use the stay provided for
holding open the front cover of the controller .
a . Check that no zone or sounder circuits are connected to the

controller, that power supplies are not switched on and that
ribbon cables in, and other cables into, the T882 are not
connected .
b. Check that all detector bases are correctly installed and,

where applicable, are fitted with their plastic clip-on
covers . Check also that no plug-in or type D801/D802
detectors are fitted .
c. Check that all other equipment is correctly installed and is

in the position specified .
d. Check that the correct cables (screened where necessary)

having the correct number of cores have been used and are
correctly installed . Also check that all necessary earthing
has been correctly carried out .
e . Check that suppression devices are fitted to all sounder

units and, where necessary, polarizing and suppression
devices are fitted to all dc auxiliary equipment such as
relays, etc .
f. At the controller, fit a 4 .7k ohm EOL resistor between each

zone input +ve and -ve, and a sounder EOL unit across each
sounder output terminal set .
NOTE : A 4 .7k ohm resistor is used to terminate the lines

of each zone detection circuit . The sounder EOL
device can be used either to terminate a bell line
(pin 1 positive, pin 3 negative), or to provide a
dummy sounder and terminate a sounder line (pin 1
positive, pins 2 and 3 negative) .
g. Carry out continuity and insulation tests on all circuits .
h. Compare the results with those recorded during installation .

If there is a significant difference in any pair of
readings, investigate the cause and ensure that the defect
is remedied .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 260

NES602
Issue 2
7 With the exception of the detection and sounder circuits,

make all remaining connections .
NOTE : The connection or disconnection of equipment after the

batteries are fitted into the controller is difficult .
k . Where batteries are required, obtain a battery fitting kit

and clamp four 6V 10Ah batteries into the controller housing
as shown on the instruction leaflet supplied with the kit .
Do not connect the batteries at this stage .
Commissioning Checks
WARNING : 1 . ANY AUXILIARY UNITS WHICH ARE CONNECTED MAY

OPERATE DURING THE COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE UNLESS
DISABLED BY WITHDRAWING FUSES ETC .
2. ALL POWER SUPPLIES TO THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE

SWITCHED OFF BEFORE ANY CONNECTIONS ARE MADE AT
THE TERMINAL FIELD, OR BEFORE A PEC OR ANY OTHER
COMPONENT IS FITTED, REMOVED OR REPLACED . CARE
MUST BE TAKEN WHEN HANDLING PECs TO AVOID PHYSICAL
DAMAGE OR BUILD-UP OF STATIC VOLTAGE .
General
23 a . The internal buzzer/sounders can generally be

silenced by operating the "SILENCE ALARM" switch
whilst the "CONTROL ENABLE" keyswitch is operated .
The internal buzzer cannot be silenced if the
controller is in an 'ALARM FIRE' condition .
b . A zone may be put into an "alarm" condition either

by connecting a 560 ohm resistor across the zone
terminals at the controller or by directly
activating a detector or a callpoint .
c . If the Latching Fault option is selected (see link

LK7), the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch and the "RESET"
switch must be operated in turn to clear any FAULT
indications which may occur in checks g,h,q, etc .

NES 6 02
Issue 2
Procedure
24 . a . Set the option links on the front panel electronics assembly

for the required functions . Links are OFF when across the
middle and the uppermost pin in each set of three pins, and
are ON when across the middle and lowest of the three pins
(see Fig Q4) . The links are to be found on the R .H . edge
(the opening edge when looking from the rear) of the PEC
Assembly .
LINK 1 ON For Nickel-Cadmium Standby Battery

LINK 2 OFF For all other supply configurations
LINK 3 ON EXTERNAL Standby dc supply used
LINK 4 OFF Standby Battery used, (charged from
controller) .
WATCH DOG SWITCH
00
C
1 R63
P62
LP
LK7 r
64
C"
MMIJ
D11
R42
R50
RU
D12
013
LK1
LK4 LA
LP1
LK6
IC16
FIG Q4 POSITION OF LINKS AND L .E .D . INDICATORS
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 262

NES602
Issue 2
NOTE If supplies are "dc only", ie no mains, LINK 2 must be

set to the OFF position .
LINK 3 ON - Continuous Sounder Circuit 1
LINK 3 OFF - Pulsed Sounder Circuit 1
LINK 4 ON - Continuous Sounder Circuit 2

LINK 4 OFF - Pulsed Sounder Circuit 2
LINK 6 ON - Sounder Test (only used during sounder

commissioning)
LINK 6 OFF - Normal
LINK 7 ON - Latching FAULT indications
LINK 7 OFF - Normal, non-latching FAULT indications
b. By means of the variable resistor RV1 on the terminal field,

set the 'Sounder 2 delay' approximately to the required
delay period (3 minutes maximum) .
c . Set the mains voltage selector on the Power Supply Unit to

suit the incoming supply (110V or 220V) and insert the
correct fuses into the Power Supply Unit for the voltage to
be used . These are ; 3A for 220V, 5A for 11OV . Insert the
key and set the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch to OFF .
d . Connect the following cables at the controller :-
(1) 4-way cable from the Power Supply Unit to PL1 on the
terminal field,
(2) 2-way cable from the front panel keyswitch to PL3 on

the front cover assembly .
(3) 50-way ribbon cable from the terminal field to PL1 on

the front cover assembly, and
(4) Earth bonding lead between the front cover assembly

and the Power Supply Unit .
e . Switch on the mains supply . Check that the supply voltage

is within the specification and that the controller POWER ON
lamp is lit . (The FAULT indicator lights and the buzzer
sounds for two seconds on initial switch on) .

NES 602
Issue 2
f. After 20 seconds if a battery is used, or instantaneously if

an external standby supply is used, the FAULT and POWER ON
indicators will start to flash and the buzzer will sound .
Turn the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch to ON and operate the
"SILENCE ALARMS" switch . The two indicators will continue
to flash but the internal sounder will stop .
g . Switch on the standby supply (or connect the internal
batteries) . Check that the supply voltage remains within
specification . Check that the controller battery faults
condition clears in approximately 20 seconds . That is, only
the POWER ON lamp is lit .
h . Switch off the mains supply . Check that the FAULT and POWER
ON indicators are flashing . Restore the supply and check
that the FAULT indicator goes out .
7 Momentarily press the "LAMP TEST/DIM" switch . Check that

all the lamps light .
k . Press and hold the "LAMP TEST DIM" switch operated . Check
that all the indicator lamps slowly dim and then slowly
return to full brightness . The "Dim/Bright" sequence should
repeat continuously while the switch remains pressed .
NOTE : It is worthwhile checking the operation of the
controller prior to connnecting the external
circuitry . If these checks are not required,
continue from Para q) .
1 . Operate the "SELECT" switch until ZONE 1 indicator lights
and then operate the "ZONE TEST" switch . Repeat for the
remaining three zones . Check that the ZONE TEST indicator
lights up when the "ZONE TEST" switch is first operated .
m . Turn the "CONTROL ENABLE" key anti-clockwise and again
operate the "ZONE TEST" switch . Check that all the ZONE
indicators again light to show that all zones are in the
"Test" mode .
n . Turn the "CONTROL ENABLE" key clockwise and operate the
"SELECT" and "CANCEL" switches in turn . Ensure that the
ZONE TEST indicator also goes out when the last zone is
cancelled .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 264

NES602
Issue 2
p. Repeat 1) to n) for the "Isolate" mode using the "ZONE

ISOLATE" switch and indicator instead of the "ZONE TEST"
switch and indicator .
q. For each zone in turn,
(1) Fit all the removable detectors into their

designated positions .
(2) Fit, and connect into the zone wiring, any

hard-wired detectors such as the type
D801/802 .
(3) Remove the EOL . Unit from the zone

terminals in the controller and fit it across
the last detector in the zone .
(4) Check that the ZONE indicator and the FAULT

indicator light up and that the buzzer
sound Silence the buzzer .
(5) Connect the zone wiring to the correct zone

terminals in the controller - ensure that
polarity is correct .
(6) Check that the ZONE and FAULT indicators go

out .
(7) Select "ZONE TEST" as in (1) above for the

particular zone being installed .
(8) Check the operation of all detectors and/or

callpoints on the zone . Ensure that an alarm
can be given from each detector/callpoint .
Check that any indicator lamp which may be
fitted to a detector/callpoint lights when
that detector/callpoint goes into alarm .
Check that it remains lit for approximately
15 seconds .
NOTE Where an indicator lamp is fitted into, or

adjacent detection device, there is no additional
requirement to check that the alarm condition is
received at the controller .

NES 602
Issue 2
The indicator lamp will relight after 8 seconds if

the alarm is still present . It may be necessary
to let a heat detector cool down or to blow the
fire on or smoke out of an ion-chamber or photo
electric smoke detector to clear the alarm
condition .
(9) Operate the "SELECT" and "CANCEL" switches until

the zone is normal . Turn the "CONTROL ENABLE"
keyswitch clockwise .
(10) Isolate the zone as given in p above . Activate a

detector/callpoint on the isolated zone and check
that the controller does not respond .
(11) Operate the "SELECT" and "CANCEL" switches until

the zone is normal . Turn the "CONTROL ENABLE"
keyswitch clockwise .
r . At the first sounder circuit input, remove the

EOL from the terminal field and fit it across
the last sounder in the circuit . Check that the
SOUNDER WIRING FAULT indicator and the common
FAULT indicator on the controller light up and
that the controller internal buzzer sounds .
Connect the sounder circuit to the terminal field
then operate the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch and the
"CANCEL" switch . Check that the FAULT indicators
go off . Repeat for the second sounder circuit .
S. Warn the personnel on board the vessel that alarm

testing is to be carried out ; check the time and
operate any detector or "alert" callpoint . Check
locally that the sounders operate correctly .
Verify that after the preset 'sounder delay' the
sounders change to give the "Second Level" alarm .
Note the time . Adjust the delay control RV1 if
necessary .
t . Where an "alarm" callpoint is fitted, repeat s

and check that all sounders operate immediately .
Silence the sounders and reset the controller
after the check .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 266

NES602
Issue 2
u. Move LK6 from the OFF to ON position . Check the

operation of each sounder in turn throughout the
vessel . All of the sounders should pulse at the
rate of 1 second ON to 10 seconds OFF . Check any
sounder which fails to operate . Return link LK6 to
the ON position at the conclusion of the test .
v . If it is required to check that the sounders will

operate in the other mode, change the positions of
links LK3 and LK4 . Operate a detector and check
that the sounders operate correctly . Replace the
links into their original positions after the
test . Silence the sounders and reset the
controller as necessary . This check is optional .
w . Turn the "CONTROL ENABLE" key anti-clockwise and

remove the key . Before closing the Front Cover
Assembly, fit any special legend strips that may
be required . It may be necessary to move the PEC
away from the fascia if it becomes difficult to
slide the strips into place .
To do this, remove the 12 captive screws from the

back of the PEC and hinge the board to the left .
Disconnect the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch at the 2-
way plug/socket on the lower right hand side of
the PEC . It should now be possible to ease the
strips into place without difficulty . Ref ix the
PEC correctly, afterwards .
Do not forget to reconnect the "CONTROL ENABLE"
switch .
NOTE It is recommended that special legend strips be
suitably labelled, before dispatch to the vessel,
by using one of the many instant lettering systems
available, eg : Letraset, Mechanorma etc . If
absolutely necessary, and in extreme situations,
the strips may be labelled, on the matt side,
using Indian ink, black spirit or water-based
marker, or even black pencil . Seal legend with a
suitable lacquer . Legend strips so marked should
however be replaced at the earliest opportunity .
x. Lift the front cover stay ; then close and secure

the front cover . Leave the wrench, that was
originally taped to the rear of the controller,
and the keyrings, which each hold two keys and a
wrench, with the person responsible for the
system .

NES 602
Issue 2
Repeater Unit Tvpe T282

Function
25 . The T282 (Fig Q5) is used to repeat, at a remote location
displays which originate at the T882 Control Unit .
Description
26 . The Repeater Unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No .
508 .013 .038 .
27 . All the visual indicators are mounted on the front cover of
the unit and they mirror the visual indicators on the T882
Control Unit (see para 5) .
28 . Under normal conditions only the POWER ON indicator should be
lit . If either the incoming power supply or the internal
regulator fail, the POWER ON indicator will turn off .
29 . The Repeater Unit has three push button switches and a enable key
switch .
The push button switches are :
LAMP DIM
LAMP TEST
SILENCE ALARM
The SILENCE ALARM is normally used to silence the internal fault

buzzer, but as an option the switch can also be used to silence
the T882 Control Unit sounder circuits . In this mode the switch
will be key enabled . The internal buzzer cannot be silenced in a
fire condition . It will only turn off when the control unit is
returned to the stand-by condition .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 268

NES602
Issue 2
FIRE
7W
ZONE
1 2 2 MLAIE
FAUfT
LAMP 3 -3
RESET
G)
FIG Q5 REPEATER UNIT TYPE T282
Installation
30 . The T282 derives it power from the T882 Control Unit . A 12 core
cable is required between the two units for the transmission of
signals and power . If there is a possibility of RFI a screened
cable must be used .
31 . A maximum of two repeater units can be connected to a T882
Control Unit .

NES .602
Issue 2
Mounting Details
32 . The T282 is mounted in a shallow housing type 6 . Fixing details

are the same as for the Control Unit type T882 - see Figs Q2 and
Q3 .
33 . a . Overall Dimensions :
Height 267mm
Width 398mm
Depth 101mm
b. Weights
Complete Unit 5 .4kg

Front Cover Assembly 2 .5kg
Environmental Characteristics :
34 . Temperature - Operating -25°C to +55 0 C

- Storage -25°C to +70°C
Relative Humidity Up to 97% R.H .
Setting to Work
Silence Alarms Switch
35 . The "SILENCE ALARMS" switch may be programmed to operate in

one of two modes :
a. The first mode permits alarm and warning sounders to be

cancelled from either the controller or the repeater
pending system reset . Further alarm, alert and warning
conditions will restart the appropriate sounder(s)
until a "SILENCE ALARMS" switch is again operated .
Exceptionally, the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch on the
controller will not silence the repeater internal
sounder (buzzer) and, in a fire alarm situation, the
controller internal buzzer will not be silenced until
the controller itself has first been reset .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 270

NES602
Issue 2
b. The other mode requires that all alarm sounders, except

the repeater internal sounder, be silenced from the
controller only . The "SILENCE ALARMS" switch at the
repeater will control only the internal fault sounder
at the repeater .
Switch Enable
36 . Normally the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch on the repeater is

active only when enabled by the keyswitch . If, however, a
link is inserted between the two 'Enable' terminals of the
Repeater, the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch will be active at all
times . The option is usually acceptable where the switch is
used to silence the one buzzer, ie : that in the T282 . Where
the Repeater "SILENCE ALARMS" switch is used to silence
SYSTEM ALARMS, the link is not to be fitted . This ensures
that only those authorized persons having a key are able to
silence the system .
Preliminary Checks
37 . a. Check that the correct cables having the

correct number of cores have been used .
b . Carry out continuity and insulation tests .
c . Compare the results with those recorded during

installation . If there is a significant difference in
any pair of readings, investigate the cause and ensure
that any defects are remedied .
d. Make all connections .
Commissioning Check
38 . The internal buzzer/sounders can generally be silenced by

operating the "SILENCE ALARM" switch whilst the "CONTROL
ENABLE" keyswitch is operated . The internal buzzer of the
controller cannot be silenced if the controller is in an
'ALARM - FIRE' condition .
39 . If necessary, obtain assistance at the repeater to verify

the receipt of indications initiated by the controller .
40 . The controller may be set into an "Alarm" condition either

by operating a detector or callpoint on the zone or by
temporarily connecting a resistor of 560 ohms across the
zone input terminals of the controller .

NES 602
Issue 2
41 . After commissioning the Controller T882, commission the Repeater

T282 as follows :
a. At the Repeater T282 : Check that the POWER ON indicator is

lit and operate the "LAMP TEST" switch . Ensure that all
lamp indicators operate . Operate the "LAMP DIM" switch and
check that the lamps dim . Adjust the internal potentiometer
to give the required low level of brilliance .
b. At the Controller T882 : Initiate a "Fault" condition by

removing the fuses from both Sounder Circuits . Leave the
fuses out .
c. At the Repeater : Check that the FAULT indicator lights and

the internal buzzer sounds .
d . Insert the "CONTROL ENABLE" key, turn it clockwise and

operate the "SILENCE ALARMS" switch . Check that the buzzers
stop (at the repeater and controller or at the repeater only
- dependent upon the switch wiring mode) .
e. At the Controller : Insert the "CONTROL ENABLE" key, turn it

clockwise and operate the "SELECT" and "ZONE TEST" switch to
put a single zone into the "Test" mode .
f. At the Repeater : Check that the ZONE TEST/ISOLATE lamp

lights .
g. At the Controller : . Operate the "CANCEL" switch and check
that the ZONE TEST/ISOLATE indication clears .
h. For each zone in turn, put the system into an "Alarm" state
and check as in j . below .
j At the Repeater T282 : Check that both the FIRE indicator

and the appropriate ZONE indicator light up . Check that the
sounders can be silenced by operating the "SILENCE ALARMS"
switch . (Note that the internal sounder at the controller
will not yet be silenced by this control) . Remove the
"Alarm" condition and reset the controller . After the
checks, replace the sounder fuses at the controller .
NOTE While an "Alarm" condition exists at the controller, ALL

"Fault" conditions are suppressed .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 272

NES602
Issue 2
k. Take out supply fuse from terminal field to remove power

from the repeater . Check that a FAULT indication is given
at the controller . Replace fuse after test .
1 . Turn the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch anti-clockwise at both the

repeater and the controller . Remove the keys .
m . Before closing the Front Cover Assembly of the repeater, fit

any special legend strips that may be required . It may prove
necessary to move the PEC away from the fascia if sliding
the strips becomes difficult . To do this, remove the 12
large captive screws from the back of the PEC and hinge the
board to the left . Disconnect the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch at
the two-way plug/socket at the lower right hand side of the
PEC . The strips can then be eased into place without
difficulty . Ref ix the PEC correctly, afterwards . Do not
forget to reconnect the "CONTROL ENABLE" switch .
NOTE It is recommended that special legend strips be suitably

labelled, on the matt side, before dispatch to the vessel,
by using one of the many instant lettering systems
available, eg Letraset, Mechanorma, etc . If absolutely
necessary, and in extreme situations, the strips may be
labelled using Indian ink, black spirit-or water-based
marker, or even black pencil . Legend strips so marked should
however be replaced at the earliest opportunity . Seal all
markings with a suitable lacquer .
n. Close and secure the front cover(s) . Leave the keyrings in a

safe place together with the wrench that was originally
taped to the back of the repeater .

NES 602
Issue 2
Stock Codes for T882 System
42 . Stock codes for items referred to in this Annex and other

associated items .
ITEM NSN THORN SECURITY SC NO .

Controller type T882
with power unit 6320-99-252-3627 508 .013 .030
Controller type T882
24Vdc only 6320-99-796-8392 508 .013 .031
Repeater type T282 508 .013 .038
T882 Terminal Field 6320-99-793-6595 509 .013 .064

T882 Power Unit 509 .013 .068
T882 Electronic Assy 6320-99-798-1934 509 .013 .070

Battery Fixing Kit 509 .013 .071
T882 Spares Kit 509 .013 .081
Variable Legend Kit 509 .013 .123
Plug in Lamps Pkt of 8 509 .013 .030
Sounder End-of-line
Pkt of 8 6320-99-759-9581 509 .013 .031
6V 9 .5AH Battery 560 .001 .013
Additional Information on T882 Systems
43 . For additional more detailed information on these units refer to

THORN SECURITY Publications UHM-1000/1 to 5 and UHM-1005/1 to 5 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX Q 274

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEXR
ANCILLARIES FOR DETECTOR CIRCUITS
I .S . Interface Unit Tvpe T867

Function
1 . The IS Interface Unit Type T867 is for use in high voltage

automatic fire detection systems installed in Division 1 and 2
hazardous areas to provide an interface between the detection
zone of a non-intrinsically safe control unit located in a safe
area and an intrinsically safe zone of fire detectors and
callpoints in a defined hazardous area .
Q M40 V swin
0 0
T867 I .S. INTERFACE UNIT
FIG R1 I .S . INTERFACE UNIT TYPE T867
Description
2. The unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No 546-002-001 NSN

4210-99-727-2246 and is in the form of a metal box with a front
cover secured by two screws . Two conduit entry holes in the top
of the box are designated respectively : NON IS WIRING and IS
WIRING ONLY . The internal circuits and terminal blocks are
incorporated in a PEC assembly mounted on the rear inside face of
the box .
3. a . Dimensions : Height 130mm, width 210mm, depth 55mm
b . Weight : 1 .54kg
MODNES/602/2/1990 275 ANNEX R

NES602
Issue 2
PowerSupply Reauirements
4. a. Input Voltage : 220V dc nominal (from control equipment
detector zone circuit) .
b. Input Current : Similar to the current drawn by a standard
detector circuit under standby, alarm and
line-leakage conditions where applicable,
when connected to compatible control
equipment .
5. Temperature : -20°C to +70 °C
Mounting Procedure
6 . The unit is secured by means of suitable bolts through three
fixing holes in the back of the box . To gain access to the
fixing holes,
a . remove the cover (2 screws)
b . remove the PEC assembly (4 screws, washers and solder
tags)
7 . Refer to the conduit layout to ascertain the correct way up for

the box and either :
a . use the box as a template to mark the fixing hole centres, or
b . mark the hole centres to the dimensions given in para . 10
8. Secure the unit in position .
9. Fit the conduit glands into the conduit entry holes .
Fixinc Centres
10 . Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig R2 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 276

NES602
Issue 2
Connecting-up
WARNING : HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION TESTS MUST ONLY BE MADE ON DETECTOR

CABLES IF THE HAZARDOUS AREA IS IN A SAFE CONDITION AND THE
CABLES ARE DISCONNECTED FROM ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT . IF THE
AREA IS CONSTANTLY SUBJECT TO HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS, THE ONLY
TEST THAT CAN BE MADE CONSISTS OF FUNCTIONALLY OPERATING
DETECTORS AND CHECKING FOR LINE LEAKAGE AT THE CONTROL UNIT .
210
r.1
75 0 0 130
r1 r1
MY C7
25
1
6o 60
3 HOLES 6.5 DIA.
FIG R2 TYPE T867 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
11 . Run the cables ensuring that the cable from the control unit
enters the gland labelled NON IS WIRING and the cable from the
detection circuit enters the gland labelled IS WIRING ONLY .
12 . Refit the PEC and its 4 retaining screws . Reconnect the box
earth to the LOCAL EARTH tag on the PEC
CAUTION : The PEC must be oriented such that its terminal

blocks are nearest to the conduit entries .
13 . Connect cables .
Equipment Compatibility
14 . The unit is suitable for use with the following THORN SECURITY
control equipment :

NES602
Issue 2
a. Marine Control and Indicating Units Type T870 Mkl and Type
T870 Mk2, also Types T871 and T872 .
b. Versatile console systems VCS Unit Types 255 and 256 .

NOTE : In versatile console systems detectors in a hazardous
area must be connected via IS Interface Units Type T867
using the connection arrangements detailed in Section
3, Fig 1 .
15 . The IS Interface Unit can be connected to THORN SECURITY ion-

chamber smoke detectors Type F35, F36 and Heat Detector Type F80
provided that all are mounted in approved detector bases . The
number of detectors is governed by the type of Control Unit used .
Deckhead mounting Type DHM5 is used with Control Unit Type T870
etc and deckhead mounting Type DHM6 is used for VCS Control Units
Type 255 and 256 . This IS Interface Unit is also suitable for use
with manual calipoints Type ZF121 and WSB 117A and an
intrinsically safe end-of-line Test Unit, Type T46 IS .
Cable Specification for Detector Circuits
16 . Refer to Section 7 .
Setting to Work
17 . The unit is checked during the setting-to-work procedure for its

associated detection circuit and no special testing is required .
I .S . Interface Assembly Tvpe System 601

Function
18 . The I .S . Interface Assembly Type System 601 is for use in low

voltage automatic fire detection systems installed in Division 1
and 2 hazardous areas . It provides an interface between the
detection zone of a non-intrinsically safe control unit located
in a safe area and an intrinsically safe zone of fire detectors
and calipoints in a defined hazardous area .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 278

NES602
Issue 2
FIG R3 I S INTERFACE ASSEMBLY TYPE SYSTEM 601
Description
19 . The assembly is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 546-004-004

NSN4210-99-736-4963 and is in the form of a metal box with a
front cover secured by two screws . Two conduit entry holes in the
top of the box are designated respectively : NON IS WIRING and IS
WIRING ONLY . There must be a physical separation of at least 50mm
between IS and Non IS wiring including inside the IS Interface
Assembly .
20 . The Assembly consists of an IS Barrier, an IS Zone Isolator and

an Earth Bar .
21 . The IS Zone Isolator provides isolation NOT disconnection of the

detector zone wiring to an IS area . The isolator is used when a
controller, such as a T880, is connected to a floating
(unearthed) power supply .
MODNES/602/2/1990 2 79 ANNEX R

NES602
Issue 2
I.S . BARRIER
LS. ZONE ISOLATOR
RELATIVE
POSITION
OF FIXING
HOLES .
FIG R4 SYSTEM 601 WITH FRONT COVER REMOVED

22 . a . Dimensions : Height7 130mm, Width 210mm, Depth 55mm
b . Weight : 1 .4kg
23 . a . Input Voltage : 21 .8V via 300-400 ohm

b . Output Voltage : To track input voltage
c . Output Current : Similar to the current drawn by a
standard detector circuit under standby
alarm and line-leakage conditions where
applicable, when connected to compatible
control equipment .
d . Input-Output Isolation : 250V ac or dc
e . Maximum Ripple : 0 .5V p-p on input or output
f . Oscillator Frequency : 100-500 kHz
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 2 80

NES602
Issue 2
24 . Temperature : -10 °C to +45°C
Mounting Procedure
25 . The unit is secured by means of suitable bolts through four

fixing holes in the back of the box . Access is gained to the
fixing holes by opening the front cover . (See Fig R4) . Location
of the fixing holes is shown in Fig R5 .
120
CIL
- 60 60
22 I
I
FIG R5 SYSTEM 601 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Cabling Requirements
26 . The cable connected into the hazardous area from the safety
barrier must comply with the requirements of BS 5345 : Pt 4 .
The screen of a cables must be continuously covered with
insulating material and earthed ONLY at the barrier bus-bar .
Hazardous area cable parameters must not exceeds the limitations
given in Table R1 .
Max . permissible cable parameter Max . permissible cable length km

DEF STAN
Gas C(UP) L(mH) L/R 61-12 MEHCBL MICC MICC
Group (uH/ohm) 16/0 .02 .5 sgmm 2L1 .5 2H1 .5
llc 0 .13 0 .42 25 0 .60 1 .02 0 .22 0 .35

lib 0 .39 1 .26 75 1 .80 3 .07 0 .66 1 .05
Ila 1 .04 3 .36 200 4 .80 8 .20 1 .76 2 .80
TABLE R1 LIMITATIONS ON I S CABLES

NES602
Issue 2
Connecting-up
WARNING : HIGH VOLTAGE INSULATION TESTS MUST ONLY BE MADE ON

DETECTOR CABLES IF THE HAZARDOUS AREA IS IN A SAFE CONDITION
AND THE CABLES ARE DISCONNECTED FROM ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT .
IF THE AREA IS CONSTANTLY SUBJECT TO HAZARDOUS CONDIIONS,
THE ONLY TESTS THAT CAN BE MADE CONSIST OF FUNCTIONALLY
OPERATING DETECTORS AND CALLPOINTS AND CHECKING FOR LINE
LEAKAGE AT THE CONTROL UNIT .
27 . Ensure that the cable from the control unit enters the gland
labelled NON IS WIRING and the cable from the hazardous area
enters the gland labelled IS WIRING ONLY .
28 . Connect the cables from the control unit to the two
terminals marked CONTROLLER on the IS Zone Isolator . CORRECT
POLARITY MUST BE MAINTAINED .
29 . Remove the 5k1 ohm resistor from terminals 3 and 4 on the IS
Barrier and connect it into the base of the last detector or
calipoint on the IS circuit (see Section 3, Fig 3 for
connection details of end-of-line resistors) .
30 . Connect detector cables to terminals 3 and 4 on the IS

Barrier .
Equipment Compatibility
31 . System 601 is suitable for use with THORN SECURITY Control

Units Type T880, T881 and T882 .
32 . The following THORN SECURITY detectors and callpoints can be

connected to System 601 .
Ion chamber smoke detectors - F712EX and MF301EX

Photo electric smoke detector - MR301EX
Infra red flame detector - MS302EX
ROR heat detectors - D801EX, D802EX, MD301E X.
MD303E and MD305EX
Static heat detectors - H604 and H904
(See Annex B for details of these detectors)
Callpoint - CP220
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 282

NES602
Issue 2
Setting to Work
33 . The unit is checked during the setting-to-work procedure for its

associated detection circuit and no special testing is required .
Extended Flashing and Indicator Units
Function
34 . Extended Flashing and Indicator Units are used when the integral
high voltage detector neon flashers or low voltage detector LED
indicators are not normally visible .
NOTE :, Extended Flashing Units are not used with F36 detectors
as these detectors are connected to control equipment
that does not have the necessary circuit to drive
flashers .
Extended Flashing Unit (Watertight)
35 . This unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 540-013-002 NSN

4210-99-542-2140 .
36 . This unit is normally used in conjunction with a deckhead

mounting Type DHM1 as the neon flasher, which is normally part of
the detector base cannot be seen when installed in a DHM1 .
37 . The unit consists of a neon clipped into a steel plate which is

attached to a standard 'Y' entry Besa Box fitted with a rubber
gasket .
38 . A one inch to 3/4 inch reducer and a 3/4 inch nipple are required
to connect the unit directly into the deckhead mounting cable
entry gland .
Extended Flashing Unit (Square),
39 . This unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No 517-001-009

NSN 4210-99-542-2137 .
40 . This unit is used where a detector is installed in a compartment

which is normally kept locked . The Flashing Unit is to be
mounted above the door leading into the compartment . It is
also to be used when a detector is not readily visible such as
inside electronic cabinets or where a detector is remote from the
remainder of the detectors on the same Group (Zone) such as the
Steering Gear Flat on an Engine Room Group .

NES602
Issue 2
41 . The unit consists of a neon clipped into an ivory plastic plate

mounted on a 76mm x 76mm pressed steel box with the knock-out
entries for cable glands .
FIRE ALARM
A
0 0
J
Q T}CR 4 $. a y
FIG R6 WATERTIGHT AND SQUARE EXTENDED FLASHING UNITS
Connections
42 . Connection to the neon in both units is made via the

terminal screws fitted on the back of the neon .
Extended Indicator (Scruare)
43 . This unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 540-003-006 NSN

4210-99-732-8811 . It is not supplied with a back box . See para
55 for Stock Codes of suitable boxes .
44 . This indicator is used for the same purpose as the Extended

Flashing Unit (Square) . See para 40 .
45 . This unit consists of a red LED mounted in a square white plastic

plate .
46 . For connection details see Fig RIO
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 284

NES602
Issue 2
ExtendedIndicator(Round)
47 . This unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 540-003-007 . It

is not supplied with a back box and is designed to the mounted on
a standard round Besa box .
48 . This indicator is used when a detector is mounted in a ceiling

void or in trunking which runs through a ceiling void and the
remote indicator is to be mounted on the false ceiling .
88
2 SCREWS
88 M 4 x 30 LG .
L.E .D . - RED
FIG R7 EXTENDED INDICATOR-SQUARE
49 . This unit consists of a red LED mounted in a round white plastic

plate .
50 . For commission details see Fig R10 .

NES602
Issue 2
83
51
2 HOLES L.E .D . - RED

0 4 .5 mm
FIG R8 EXTENDED INDICATOR-ROUND
Extended Indicator Tvpe E18
51 . This unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 517-001-131 .
52 . This indicator is used when an extended indicator is to be

mounted on a deckhead or when a high I .P . rating is required .
53 . This unit consists of a red LED mounted in a white round adaptor
plate which is mounted on a deckhead mounting Type DHM7 . The
glands and locknuts for the E18 are supplied separately . See
para 55 for Stock Codes .
54 . For connection details see Fig R10 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 286

NES602
Issue 2
2 FIXING HOLES
0 5mm ON
128 .5mm P .C .D.
FIG R9 EXTENDED INDICATOR TYPE E18
ii
-VE FOR UK72R

-VE FOR HEAT DETECTORS
AND UK72EX
+ VE
FIG R10 CONNECTION DETAILS FOR EXTENDED INDICATORS

NES602
Issue 2
Additional Stock Codes
55 . Item THORN SECURITY SC No .

Square Surface Mounting Back Box 400-001-001
Square Semi-Flash Mounting Back Box 400-001-002
20mm Gland 120-049-133
20mm Nut 115-001-146
Detector Isolate Timer Type MTD 24
Function
56 . This unit enables a smoke detector or a number of smoke detectors

on a single fire detection zone to be isolated from the rest of
the zone and from the control unit . It is used to isolate
detectors in a compartment, such as an Engineer's Workshop, where
welding or similar smoke generating work is periodically carried
out .
57 . The unit is supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 584-001-001 and is

in the form of a metal box with a hinged front cover secured by
one screw . Cable entries are through glands in the bottom of the
box . The isolate period is for 30 to 60 minutes and a buzzer
will sound approximately 2 minutes before the isolate period is
up to warn the Engineer to set the unit for a further period
if the work has not been completed . The unit also has a reset
switch so that the isolated detectors can be brought back into
operation if the work is completed before the isolate period has
expired .
58 . a. Dimensions : Height 182mm Width 222mm

Depth 101mm
b. Weight : 2 .5kg
Power SuDDly Reauirement
59 . The MTD24 requires a local 24V dc supply .
Mounting Procedure
60 . The unit is secured by means of suitable bolts through the three

holes in the back of the box . To gain access to the fixing holes
lower the hinged front cover .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 2 88

NES602
Issue 2
Fixing Centres
61 . Location of the fixing holes are shown in Fig R12 .
FIG R11 DETECTOR ISOLATE TIMER TYPE MTD 24

NES602
Issue 2
205 (REF.)
27.5 150
it
140
162 (REF .)
102.5
FIG R12 MTD24 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS

Connect inc-up
62 . Where possible, the detector(s) to be isolated should be the last

one on a zone (group) of detectors .
Connection details of the MTD 24 are shown in Fig R13 .

NOTE : If the detectors to be isolated are at the end of a zone an
End-of-Line resistor must be fitted in the base of the last
detector and between terminals 2 and 6 on the MTD24
terminal block .
The unit has a built in buzzer but an external buzzer and/or lamp
can be fitted if required .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 2 90

NES602
Issue 2
Al A2 A3 C2 MTD 24
E.O.LL`44K7
0
NC NO C C NC NO C NO C NC NO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
LAST
DETECTOR 0 0'b y Q 0 O 9
IN THE LINE
ISOLATED I
E.O.L. I
I
j
I
I
,P 24V DC
±SUPPLY
-VE
FROM
CONTROL 100mA
UNIT OR MAX
PREVIOUS
DETECTOR ® DETECTOR ISOLATED
+VE WEIGHT 25 Kg
FIG R13 CONNECTION DETAILS FOR MTD 24
Setting-to-Work
63 . The isolate period has been factory set for approximately 30
minutes . If a period of 60 minutes is preferred remove resistor
R2 from the circuit board and replace the 30 min legend in the
isolate push button by the 60 min legend provided .
With th MTD 24 in the non-isolated state, remove thedetector from

its base . Check that the controller shows a Fault . Replace the
detector and check that the Fault clears . Press the Isolate
Switch and remove the detector . Check that no Fault shows on the
controller . Reset the MTD 24 and check that the controller now
shows a Fault . Replace the detector and check that the Fault
clears .

NES602
Issue 2
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX R 292

NES602
Issue 2
ANNEX S
ANCILLARIES FORCONTROL UNITS
Relay Unit Tvpe T12M/HD
Function
1 . This unit is designed for use in alarm sounder circuits where the
alarm load exceeds the rating of the alarm contacts in the
control unit .
IwU'01t4 amw wimeT12U^CI
e e
FIG S1 RELAY UNIT TYPE T12M/HD

Description
2 . The metal case houses an electromagnetic relay having two sets of

changeover contacts . Each set of contacts is available at the
terminal block for normally closed or normally open operation .
The relay is mounted on a removable chassis, and the box is
fitted with a front cover secured with screws . The unit is
supplied to THORN SECURITY SC No . 541-001-006 . NSN 6350-99-743-
0429 .
Dimensions and weight,
3. a. Dimensions : height 108mm, width 159mm, depth 63 .5mm
b. Weight : 1 .36kg approx .
Operating Voltage and Current
4. a. Relay coil : 24V dc at 2 .5W
b. Relay contacts are rated 25A at 24V dc (resistive) or 5A at

220V ac .
MODNES/602/2/1990 293 ANNEX S

NES602
Issue 2
Mountinct Procedure
5. a. Remove the cover and relay chassis .
b. Drill the box to take the required number of cable glands .

Remove all swarf .
C. Bolt the box to the bulkhead using the two 7mm diameter
holes provided, ensuring that the mounting is rigid and the
box level .
d. Refit the relay chassis and cover .
Fixing Centres
6 . Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig S2 .
149
49
98
49
22 105 22
FIG S2 TYPE T12M/HD FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Connecting Cables
7. a. Relay coil circuit . Ship wiring, in l .5mm cable or

equivalent, up to a maximum of 360m in length .
b. Sounder switching circuits . Wiring size will depend on the

alarm sounder load(s) and cable length . It is to be of
sufficient cross-sectional area to limit the voltage drop in
the sounder circuit to 1 .0V under maximum current conditions
(See Section 7) .
CAUTION : Suitable suppression capacitors are to be connected
across the contacts when the load is inductive (see Fig S3) .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX S 294

NES602
Issue 2
24 V d .c .
(SWITCHED)
2 o
N/C 3 0
CONTACT C 4 0 A.1 .
N/O 5 0 !
N7C G o
CONTACT C 7 0 A .2 .
L N/O 8 o
FIG S3 TYPE T12/HD CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Setting-to-Work
8 . On raising the alarm, check that the relay operates its

associated sounder .
SurgeSuppression Unit Tvpe T61
Function
9 . Where surges in the 24V d .c . power supply are known to be present

or suspected a Surge Suppression Unit Type T61 must be fitted in
the supply line to the Control Unit
10 . A capacitor/choke network effectively reduces the surge peak
thereby considerably reducing the likelihood of damage to
electronic'components in the Control Unit .

NES602
Issue 2
lerdMq(ftCU*
I MARINE T61
FIG S4 SURGE SUPPRESSION UNIT TYPE T61

Description
11 . A metal box houses the capacitor/choke assembly which is mounted

inside the box . . on a metal bracket . The box is fitted with a
front cover secured by two screws . The unit is supplied to THORN
SECURITY SC No 508-001-023 NSN5920-99-539-7528 .

12 . a . Dimensions : Height 108mm, width 159mm, depth 66mm .
b. Weight : 700gm .
Operating Voltage and Current
13 . a . Input Voltage : 24V dc nominal
b. Input Current : dependent on system requirements
Mountinq Procedure
14 . a . Remove the cover and the capacitor/choke bracket .

b. Drill the box to take the required number of cable
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX S 296

NES602
Issue 2
glands .Remove all swarf .
c. Bolt the box to the bulhead using the two 7mm diameter holes
provided .
d. Refit the capacitor/choke bracket and cover .
Fixing Centres
15 . Locations of the fixing holes are shown in Fig S5 .
FIG S5 TYPE T61 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
Connections
16 . Connect the 24V power supply to the input terminals . Connect the
ongoing power supply wiring to the Control Unit at the output
terminals . Observe correct polarity for both input and output
connections .
Setting-towork
17 . No checks are necessary if Control Unit is functioning correctly .

NES602
Issue 2
181 T81
I I
INPUT+ +OUTPUT
1 I L1 i 3
C1
I 680 N F
I 100 V
1
OUTPUT+
4
I
1
T o +INPUT
L__J L__1
FIG S6 TYPE T61 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
Mimic Drive/Zonal Output Module
Function
18 . The Zonal Output Module which is designed for use with the T880
Controller, provides, within limits, an output from any zone
either singly or in conjunction with any other zone(s) to operate
apparatus external to the Controller (such as the shut-down of
air-conditioning plants, close fire doors etc) .
19 . The module may be mounted within the Type T880 Controller and
operated in conjunction with the Terminal Field Type E or it may
be fitted into the case of a Relay 5010 or 5016 if more than four
relays or particularly complex programming is required . The
Module may alternatively be used to drive Mimic Indicators where
the full facilities of a Repeater Unit are not required or where
it is required to provide indication of the location of a fire on
a'- geographic mimic .
20 . When used as a Mimic Drive the module is to be fitted in the

Mimic Panel as this greatly reduces the number of cores required
between the controller and the mimic .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX S 298

NES602
Issue 2
21 . The Module receives serial data from the Type T880 Controller .
This is then checked and converted into parallel data which is
output via open-collector drivers to either a mimic Unit or to
Zonal Circuits . The particular use of the Module is determined
by links fitted at the commissioning stage .
Salient Features
22 . Theoretically, the zonal outputs may be wired and cross-wired in

any way to give grouped operation of the four output relays built
into the Terminal Field Type E . Practically, however, unlimited
cross-wiring is not possible because of the inevitable wiring
congestion and the low number of available terminals .
23 . Terminal Field Type E provides an interface between the assembled
groups and the controlled circuits . Each relay on the terminal
field has two 'diode' inputs in order that simple cross-group
programming may be undertaken . For certain applications,
additional isolating diodes may be necessary to prevent more than
one relay operating at a time . Should more than four relay
outputs be required, a Relay 5010 or 5016 Unit is to be used as
an extension to the module .
24 . When the module is used as a Mimic Panel Driver, either LED or

filament lamp indicators can be used . Where filament lamps are
used, the filaments are continuously checked for continuity .
25 . The buzzer output, when used, may be 'silenced' by the switch
marked 'SILENCE ALARMS' at the Control Unit and/or if one is
fitted, at the Mimic Unit . The Alarm output on the Zonal Output
Module can only be 'silenced' at the Control Unit .
Construction
26 . The Mimic Drive/Zonal Output Module is a PEC assembly having

provision at the left hand end for onward connection by a 64-way
DIN type connector . When used for Zonal Output Drive purposes,
the module is fitted into the Terminal Field Type E fitted at
the controller . The Terminal Field is itself a PEC assembly
which carries on the left hand side the mating part for the 64-
way DIN connector fitted on the module . Alternatively, the
Module can be supplied complete with a 64-way DIN connector
fitted to a 64-core ribbon cable (See Fig S7) .
27 . a . Overall Dimensions : Height 20mm

Width 100mm
Length 220mm
Weight 180g (without ribbon
cable)

NES602
Issue 2
b. Enviromental Limits : Temperature ange (operating)

-25 C to +60 C
.Temperature ange (storage)
-25 C to +70 C
Relative Humidity
Up to 97% Non-condensing
Electrical Specification
28 . a . Supply requirement : 12-32V dc at 100mA, plus load .
OV must be commoned with OV of
Controller .
b. Output : Open collector o/p's rated 30V
dc at 150mA . Current limited
1) in the Module by a 100 ohm
resistor for lamp/relay drive or
2) by a resistor of value suitable
for LED drive (value dependent upon
the LED supply voltage at the Mimic
Unit) .
c. Cabling requirements : Where the Module is fitted remotely
from the T880 Controller, screened
cable must be used for the Data
signals R1 - R6 .
Stock Codes
29 . Item THORN SECURITY SC No .
Mimic Drive/Zonal O/P Module 509-013-059
(Kit for Term Field Type E)
Mimic Drive/Zonal O/P Module
(with ribbon cable) 509-013-069
Relay Unit Type 5010 567-005-004
Relay Unit Type 5016 567-005-005
Proarammina and Settina-to-Work
30 . For full details on programming and setting-to-work refer to
THORN SECURITY Technical Publication UHM1004/1 to 3 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX S 300

NES602
Issue 2
Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module
Function
31 . The Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module THORN SECURITY SC No .

401-006-012 permits sounder operation to any pre-determined
ON/OFF pattern . The pattern may comprise up to 16 sections of
equal length . The length of the sections may be either 0 .5, 1 or
2 seconds . Each section may be switched to turn sounder ON or
OFF . Thus, if the sections were defined as 1 second long, three
adjacent sections would, if switched ON, allow sounder to operate
for three seconds .
32 . Although the unit may be adapted for use with other controllers,
it is primarily devised to be used in conjunction with the type
T880 Controller set up to drive a single-stage alarm with
continuous sounders . The sounder line monitoring signal of the
type T880 controller is not affected by the module .
The nodule has two outputs, each rated at 2A .
Fitting the Module
33 . The Sounder Pulsing Module is supplied as a PEC assembly which

may be mounted either inside the controller type T880 or within a
separate housing . The former is preferred (see Fig S7) .
Use four suitable screws for fixing the unit . Pillars are
provided inside the controller housing on the right hand side .
Screws are not provided with the unit as the mounting arrangement
is variable .
Programming and Setting-to-Work
34 . For full details on programming and setting-to-work refer to

THORN SECURITY Technical Publication FIL-0005 .
Lamp Dim Module
Function
35 . The Lamp Dim •Module, THORN SECURITY SC No . 509-013-108, is

designed for use with Controllers T880 and T881 in those marine
installations where a T680 Power Supply Unit is not fitted, i .e .
where the controller is powered from a battery and charger .

NES602
Issue 2
36 . The module enables the lamp supply normally provided by the T680
unit to be replaced by a regulated lamp supply developed directly
from a 24V (nominal) dc supply . This supply is then used to
provide a lamp dim facility . The brightness of the lamps may be
varied by a pre-set potentiometer fitted either at the dimmer
module or remote from the module .
37 . The input of the Lamp Dim Module is protected against reverse
polarity, etc ., by a 2 .5V fuse, FS1 . A similar value fuse, FS2,
is used to protect the output against overload or short-circuits .
Fitting the Module
38 . Supplied as a PEC assembly, the Lamp Dim Module is to be
fitted inside the T880/T881 controller . Four hankbushes are
provided at the lower left hand side of the rear face. of the
housing for mounting the module . For fixing, use M3 x 6mm
spacers with M3 crinkle washers . Use M3 x 6mm spacers to
separate the PEC from the hankbushes . Ensure that the PEC is
mounted so that both the terminal block and the present
potentiometer (RV1) remain accessible once the main controller
deckplate and terminal field assemblies are fitted (See Fig S7)
Setting-to-Work,
39 . For full details on setting-to-work see THORN SECURITY Technical

Publication FIL-0007 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX S 3 02

0
d
z
M
Cl)
rn
SI-1 ZONE 01( FAULT
0
IS ZONE X6 KILL INHIBIT SWITCHES
N
MAIN ELECTRONICS PC .B. SWITCHES
SS LANOIHARINI SELECT SWITCH
N S C . N . SOP 01) •0 11 IbtH96 w lever PC b I
1
a
1 SWITCH INTERFACE P.C .B .
S .C N. 509-013-071
-49vPLT
Co ~IIIIIIIU,
J AUK CONTROL
PLS ACCESS IAHPS-PA OF I- SCN S09 . 01) •O)0
1
FUSESSA-PKOFIO-SCN
2 .01) 509 . •0))
PL e 1 PLH FROM COVER CONTROLS
0 7
////%/////
/llllllU///
M LINKS 2-7 FUNCTION SELECT
MIMIC DRIVEUZONAL OUTPUT R C .B . s .co . so9-on-ost
K
*V x%
9`
RI)9
I I OUTPUT DELAY
ADJUSTMENT 161 RELAY PROGRAHNING
0 CONNECTION BLOCK
SI
TIS ITS( 1
TERMINAL FIELD, E
S.CN .S09-011-061
Tel 1TIA'1
VOLTS SET
DECK PLATE
PATERN SET
1v^
Tel
SCN SO9 .01)- 106 11171CYClt IENGTH)

SCN S49-013-001 11111P1111(
LEIIOTHI PROGRAMABLE SOUNDER
z PULSING MODULE
M SCN 101-006-I1r
X
En

NES602
Issue 2
Muster Alarm Interface Unit Tvpe T480
Function
40 . The Muster Alarm Interface Unit THORN SECURITY SC No . 517-001-182

is designed to act as interface between the Fire Detection
Control Unit and alarm sounders throughout the ship, so that the
same sounders can also be used for a muster alarm .
41 . Under the normal circumstances the sounders are connected through

the Interface Unit to the Fire Detection Control Unit so that all
the sounders are monitored by the Control Unit .
42 . In the event of a fire alarm, the Bi output from the Control Unit
will energize immediately, causing the sounders connected to the
Bi output from the Interface Unit to sound immediately . If the
Control Unit is not silenced within the delay period (normally
set to two minutes) the B2 output of the Control Unit will
energize . This will cause the sounders connected to the B2
output from the Interface Unit to be connected directly to the
ship's emergency dc supply via heavy duty relays (15 Amp) . In a
fire condition, the sounders will follow the sequence set in the
Control Unit . It is recommended that normally the Control Unit
is set to produce a continuous rather than a pulsed output to
avoid confusion with the Muster Alarm .
43 . If the Muster Alarm Switch is switched on the non-latching

'pulse' position, the sounders connected to both Bi and B2
outputs of the Interface Unit will be connected to the ship's
emergency supply for as long as the switch is operated . This
position may therefore be used for sending morse messages on the
ship's alarm sounders .
44 . If the Muster Alarm Switch is switched to the latched 'Muster'

position, the sounders connected to both B1 and B2 outputs of the
Interface Unit will sound seven short pulses and one long pulse,
until the Muster Alarm Switch is switched off .
Dimensions and Weight,
45 . a . Dimensions
Height 238mm
Length 238mm
Depth 85mm
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX S 3 04

NES602
Issue 2
b. Weight
Net Weight 2 .2kg
46 . Supply Voltage - Maximum 32V

- Mimimum 20V
'Output Current' : B1 OUT 2 .5A max

B1 OUT + B" OUT - 15A max
Alarm Contact Rating - 32V dc, 2 .5A max .
Quiescent Current - 0 Amps

Maximum Current through the Muster Alarm Switch 250mA
Muster Alarm Timing
47 . The signal comprises seven short pulses, one long pulse and a
pause before re-starting . The time periods are :-
short pulse - 1 period

interval between pulses - 1 period
long pulse - 4 periods
pause - 2 periods
The period is adjustable from approximately 0 .5 seconds to

approximately 2 seconds .
Mounting Procedure
48 . a . 4 in no . 20mm 'knock-outs' are provided in the top and

bottom of the box for fitting the cable glands . Remove the
appropriate knock-outs .
b. Fix the unit using the fixing holes shown in Fig . S8 .
c . Run the cable as shown in Fig S9 .
MODNES/602/2/1990 3 05 ANNEX S

NES602
Issue 2
230
115
i
• e e e
230 180 • e e
TB1 TB2
• e e e
I
J
25 0 GO
I ---J 45 lam--- 140 45 ~-

FIG S8 T480 FIXING HOLE LOCATIONS
WARNINGS, : The unit contains C-MOS integrated circuits which can
be damaged by static . Care must be taken when handling the PEC .
Do not touch the PEC track or the components . If the PEC is
removed from the equipment,it must be stored in an anti-static
packing . Undek Iio circumstances should it be packed unprotected
in ordinary polythene or polystyrene .
Ensure that the dc supply cables and B2 sounder circuit cables

are adequately sized .
Notes : 1 . The sounders connected to 'Bi OUT' must be

suppressed and polarized . (See Controller
Handbook) .
2 . If the sounder circuit connected to 'B2 OUT' is to
be monitored, all sounders must be suppressed and
polarized .
3 . All monitored sounder circuits must be run from

one sounder to the next without spurs or tees .
4. Irrespective of monitoring, all sounding must be

suppressed .
MODNES/602/2/1990
ANNEX S 306

NES602
Issue 2
5 . It is recommended that the dc supply to the

Muster Alarm Interface Unit is connected to the
same ship's emergency dc supply to the Fire
Detection System Controller so that the Controller
monitors the supply .
6. If the 'Pulse' facility is not required, use a two

position switch and do not connect the 'Pulse'
input .
7 . As part of the installation, DO NOT connect the

dc Power Supply or the Sounder EOL devices
Setting-to-Work
49 . a . Fit Link 1 in the appropriate position .
b. Connect the power to the T480
c. Commission the Controller as detailed in the relevant

handbook (Note that this should check the operaton of all
sounders in the Fire mode) .
d. Switch the 'Muster Alarm Switch' to the 'Muster Alarm'

position . Check that all sounders sound for seven short
periods and one lond period . If necessary, adjust RV1 to
alter the speed of the pulses .
e. Switch the 'Muster Alarm Switch' to the 'Pulse' position (if

fitted) and check that sounders operate all the time the
switch is operated .
Muster Alarm Switch
50 . The Muster Alarm Switch is supplied as a separate item to THORN

SECURITY SC No . 401-005-016 . The switch is designed for console
mounting .

H Z
~z N
z0
Mz
•
G 0\
• O
x t=J
En
N
N
N
O A .( . MAIN
N SUPPLY
POWER FIRE
N 24V D.c • UNIT CONTROLLER
EMERGENCY
N STANDBY 82 81
t0
'.0 SUPPLY
0
TB1
M
H 8 ~ . 1 0
T480
MUSTER
U
NN - 2
ACCOMOOATION ETC . SOUNDERS
IDELAYED .ON FIRE)
SEE NOTE I
En
t0 62 OUT . 30
ALARM E
0 0
0
INTERFACE 82 OUT : 40 L
T62
UNIT
B2 IN . i
C) 82 IN - 20 SOUNDERS ADJACENT TO FIRE PANELS
H . INSTANT ON FIRE)
H SEE NOTE I
0 51 OUT . 1 E
z 0
W BI OUT- 40 ------------
1~ L
O
00 till 81 IN +
H 5
H 61 IN - 6
L-+ LAMP SUPPLY
Cn NO 7'0
M 6 0
0 J
7d ALARM
NC 9 INDICATOR
H IA
.P 0
00 PULSE 100
0 COMMON MUSTER
Ov 11 0 ALARM
2A 0 SWITCH
MUSTER 120
NOTE
IF IT IS NOT REQUIRED TO MONITOR THE 82
SOUNDER CIRCUIT, THE POLARISING OIODE ON MUSTER ALARM
THE SOUNDERS AND E .O .L .'s ARE NOT REQUIRED. SWITCH
)ADDITIONAL IF
REQUIRED)
NES602
Issue 2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Ancillaries for control units . Annex S .

lamp dim module . Annex S, para 35 .
mimic drive/zone output module . Annex S, para 18 .
muster Alarm Interface unit type T480 .
Annex S, para 40 .
programmable sounder pulsing module . Annex S, para 31 .
relay unit type T12/HD . Annex S, para 1 .
surge suppression unit type T61 . Annex S, para 9 .
Ancillaries for detector circuits . Annex R .
detector isolate timer type MTD24 . Annex R, para 56 .
extended flashing unit (square) . Annex R, para 39 .
extended flashing unit (watertight) . Annex R, para 35 .
extended indicator (round) . Annex R, para 47 .
extended indicator (square) . Annex R, para 43 .
extended indicator type E18 . Annex R, para 51 .
intrinsically safe interface assembly type system 601 .
Annex R, para .18 .
intrinsically safe interface unit type T867 .
Annex R, para 1 .
Alarm sounders 0519, 1213, Annex G .
Automatic fire detection system . Annex A .
Cable requirements . 0701 .

Callpoints . 0513, Annex E .
Callpoint testing . 1210
Continuity tests . 0724 .
Control units, types of
T864 . Annex K .
T865 . Annex I .
T868 . Annex M .
T870 Mk2 . Annex L .
T880 . Annex N .
T881 . Annex 0 .
T882 . Annex Q .
VCS255 . Annex H .
VCS256 . Annex H .
Current ratings . 0904 .
dc supply connections . 0707 .

Deckhead mountings . Annex C .
Definitions . 0401 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
309
NES 602
Issue 2
Detection circuits .
insulation resistation .
high voltage . 0722 .
low voltage . 0723 .
Detection circuits, non I .S .'0715 .
Detectors . 0502, Annex B .
Detector bases, Annex C .
Detector functional tests . 1203 .
Detector heads . Annex B .
Detector isolate timer unit type MTD24 . Annex R, para 56 .
Detector, siting . 0502 .
adjacent magazines . 0508c .
compartmentation . 0508a .
complex space shape . 0508a .
electronic equipment space . 0508d .
engine room . 0508a .
high velocity air currents . 0508a .
magazines . 0508b .
safety . 1101 .
Detector, types . Annex B .
heat sensitive . 0509, Annex B, para 65 .
D801, D802, D801ex, D802ex, Annex B, para 79 .
F80, F81, F82 . Annex B, para 70 .
H series . Annex B, para 97 .
H600 and H900 series . Annex B, para 98 .
MD300 series . Annex B, para 89 .
infra-red flame . 0511, Annex B, para 46 .
F70 . Annex B, para 51 .
MS302ex . Annex B, para 60 .
S610 . Annex B, para 55 .
ion chamber smoke . 0508 . Annex B, para 1 .
F35, F36 . Annex B, para 8 .
F712, F712ex . Annex B, para 16 .
MF300 series . Annex B, para 22 .
photo electric smoke . 0508 . Annex B para 28 .
MR300 series . Annex B para 28 .
End of line test unit . 0516, 121, Annex F .

Extended flasher and indicator units . Annex R, para 34 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
310
NES602
Issue 2
Fire detection systems .

T864 Mk2 automatic fire detection system . Annex K .
T865 automatic fire detection unit . Annex I .
T868 automatic fire detection system . Annex M .
T870 Mk2 automatic fire detection system . Annex L .
T880 automatic fire detection system . Annex N .
T881 automatic fire detection system . Annex 0 .
T882 automatic fire detection system . Annex Q .
VCS automatic fire detection system . Annex H .
Fire tests . 1206 .
Heat sensitive detector heads . 0509, Annex B para 65 .

High intensity warning indicators . 0522, 1214,
Annex G para 11 .
Infra red flame detectors . 0511, Annex B para 46 .

Insulation resistance tests .
H .V . detection circuits . 0722 .
LV detection circuits . 0723 .
Intrinsically safe assembly type system 601 .
Annex R para 18 .
Intrinscially safe circuits for sounders and other warning
devices . 0714 .
Intrinsically safe detection circuits . 0708 .
Intrinsically safe unit type T867 . Annex R para 1 .
Lamp dim module . Annex S para 35 .
Mains ac supply connection . 0706 .

Mimic drive/zonal output module . Annex S para 18 .
Mounting of equipment . 0601 .
Muster alarm interface unit type T480 . Annex S para 40 .
Photo electric smoke detectors . 0508, Annex B para 28 .

Photographic films protection of . 1003 .
Power supplies .
current ratings . 0904 .
derivation . 0902 .
general . 0901 .
surge protection . 0905 .
Power supply units, types of .
T605 Mk2 . Annex J .
T680 . Annex P .
VCS 257 . Annex H para 13 .
Probe units . 0508 a(2) Annex D .
Programmable sounder pulsing module . Annex S para 31 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
311
NES 602
Issue 2
Protection of equipment .
during painting operations . 0804 .
general . 0801 .
Radioactive sources, storage of . 1002 .
Related documents . 0201 .
Relay flasher unit type T430 . Annex M para 18 .
Relay unit type T12/HD . Annex S .
Repeater units, types of .
T27/6 . Annex H .
T27/12 . Annex H .
T270 Mk3 . Annex L para 13 .
T273 . Annex M, para 4 .
T280 . Annex N para 25 .
T281 . Annex 0 para 21 .
T282 . Annex Q, para 25 .
Safety .
disposal of burnt out selenium rectifiers . 1102 .
ion chamber smoke detector heads . 1101 .
Smoke detectors
ion chamber . 0508, Annex B para 1 .
photo electric . 0508, Annex B para 28 .
Sounder circuits, non I .s . 0718 .
Storage of detector heads containing radioactive sources .
1002 .
Storing equipment, general . 1001 .
Supplies, derivation of . 0902 .
Surge protection . 0905 .
Surge suppression unit type T61 . Annex S para 9 .
System function check . 1202 .
Variable legend strips .
for T880 system . Annex N paras and 33 .
for T881 system . Annex 0 paras 6 and 27 .
VCS automatic fire detection system . Annex H .
Voltage drop .
calculations . 0719 .
limitations . 0717 .
MODNES/602/2/1990
312
Inside Rear Cover

© Crown Copyright 2000

Copying Only as Agreed with DStan
Defence Standards are Published by and Obtainable from :
Defence Procurement Agency

An Executive Agency of The Ministry of Defence
Directorate of Standardization
Kentigern House
65 Brown Street
GLASGOW G2 8EX
DStan Helpdesk
Tel 0141 224 2531/2

Fax 01412 4 2503
Internet e-mail enquiries@dstan.mod.uk
File Reference
The DStan file reference relating to work on this standard is D/DStan/069/02/602
Contract Requirements
When Defence Standards are incorporated into contracts users are responsible for their correct
application and for complying with contractual and statutory requirements . Compliance with
a Defence Standard does not in itself confer immunity from legal obligations .
Revision of Defence Standards
Defence Standards are revised as necessary by up issue or amendment . It is important that

users of Defence Standards should ascertain that they are in possession of the latest issue or
amendment. Information on all Defence Standards is contained in Def Stan 00-00 Standards
for Defence Part 3 , Index of Standards for Defence Procurement Section 4 Ìndex of Defence
Standards and Defence Specifications' published annually and supplemented regularly by
Standards in Defence News (SID News) . Any person who, when making use of a Defence
Standard encounters an inaccuracy or ambiguity is requested to notify the Directorate of
Standardization (DStan) without delay in order that the matter may be investigated and
appropriate action taken .

Fire Detection - Afa Minerva T882

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fire Detection - Afa Minerva T882

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ministry of Defence

Defence Standard 02-602 (NES 602)

Guide to the Installation of Thorn Security

Issue 2 Publication Date March 1991

NES 602 ISSUE 1

AMDT INSERTED BY DATE

NAVAL ENGINEERING STANDARD 602

GUIDE TO THE INSTALLATION OF

AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION SYSTEMS

The issue and use of this Standard

is authorized on behalf of the

Controller of the Navy by :

Director General Marine Engineering

5. Where attention is drawn to hazards, those quoted may not necessarily be

MOD Tender or Contract Process

CONDITIONS OF RELEASE (ii)

SECTION 2 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1

Fig 1 Typical VCS Fire

SECTION 5 SITING OF EQUIPMENT 12

Control & Indicating Equipment 0501

Fig 6 Detector Mounted on 15

Insulation Resistance Tests for H V 0722

SECTION 8 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT 28

SECTION 9 POWER SUPPLIES 30

SECTION 10 STORING EQUIPMENT 30

Ion Chamber Smoke Detector Heads 1101

Insulation Tests 1201

Table B2 List of MR301 Range of 56

Detector Heads MD300 Series 89

Deckhead Mounting for Flame Detector 87

ANNEX D PROBE UNITS, 101

CP200 Series Callpoints 8

ANNEX F END OF LINE TEST UNIT 125

ANNEX G ALARM SOUNDERS AND HIGH 129

ANNEX H VCS AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTION 137

Fig H5 6 Group Repeater Panel for 143

ANNEX I AUTOMATIC FIRE DETECTOR 151

ANNEX J MARINE POWER UNIT TYPE 157

ANNEX K AUTOMATIC CONTROL AND 161

ANNEX L FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T870, 167

Marine Control & Indicating Unit Type 870 Mk2 1

ANNEX M FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T868 179

ANNEX N FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T880 191

Fig N1 Control & Indicating Unit 193

Repeater Unit Type T280 25

ANNEX 0 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T881 229

ANNEX P POWER SUPPLY UNIT TYPE T680 241

ANNEX 0 FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM TYPE T882 247

ANNEX R ANCILLARIES FOR DETECTOR CIRCUITS 275

I S Interface Unit Type T867 1

Cable Specification for Detector Circuits 16

Dimensions and Weight 58

Fig R11 Detector Isolate Timer 289

ANNEX S ANCILLARIES FOR CONTROL UNITS 293

Relay Unit Type T12M/HD 1

Programmable Sounder Pulsing Module 31

ALPHABETICAL INDEX 309

1. This Naval Engineering Standard (NES) is sponsored by the Procurement

2. ht is to be applied as required to any Ministry of Defence contract for the

3 . If it is found to be unsuitable for any particular requirement the Sponsor is

5. No alteration is to be made to this NES except by the issue of an authorized

6. Unless otherwise stated, reference in this NES to approval, approved,

This page is intentionally blank .

0102 The fire detection equipment, when installed, is to function as a completely